Quarterlytics / Industrials / Goodwin

Goodwin

gdwn · LSE Industrials
Claim this profile
Ticker gdwn
Exchange LSE
Sector Industrials
Industry
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2023 Annual Report · Goodwin
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
D I R E C T O R S   R E P O R T   A N D   A C C O U N T S

3 O th  A P R I L   2 O 2 3

INDEX

  1
  2

Notice of Annual General Meeting 
Notes to Notice of Annual General Meeting

     GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT 
Chairman’s Statement
  3
Summary of Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss 
  7
Objectives, Strategy and Business Model 
  8
Principal Risks and Uncertainties
13
Corporate Social Responsibility
15

     DIRECTORS’ REPORTS 
22
25
28
32
39

Report of the Directors
Corporate Governance Report
Audit Committee Report 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy and Report
Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect of the  
Annual Report and the Financial Statements

     AUDITOR’S REPORT 
40

Independent Auditor’s Report to the Members of Goodwin PLC

     FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
48
49
50
52
53
54
92
93
94
104 Alternative Performance Measures

Consolidated Statement of Profit or Loss
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 
Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity  
Consolidated Balance Sheet
Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows
Notes to the Financial Statements
Company Balance Sheet 
Company Statement of Changs in Equity
Notes to the Company Financial Statements 

105 FIVE YEAR FINANCIAL SUMMARY 

FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

Accounting policies                              54 

Estimates and judgements           61 

Revenue                                65 

Alternative performance measures  104 

Finance costs (net)                         68 

Right-of-use assets              71 

Borrowings                                           77 

Financial risk management           81 

Subsequent events              90 

Capital and reserves                             81 

Guarantees and contingencies     90 

Segmental information       63 

Capital commitments                           90 

Intangible assets                            75 

Staff numbers and costs     67 

Cash and cash equivalents                  77 

Interest rate swap                          86 

Taxation                                68 

Company statements                           92 

Investments in subsidiaries          72 

Deferred tax                                          80 

Inventories                                     76 

Dividend and capital 
expenditure policy                                12 

Earnings per share                               69 

Property, plant and equipment     70 

Provisions                                       79 

Related parties                               90 

Trade and other 
receivables                           77 

Trade and other 
liabilities                               79

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
GOODWIN PLC 
www.goodwin.co.uk 

Registered in England and Wales, Number 305907 
Established 1883 

T. J. W. Goodwin
(Chairman)

Directors: 
M. S. Goodwin
(Managing Director)
Mechanical
Engineering Division

N. Brown

B. R. E. Goodwin

S. R. Goodwin 
(Managing Director) 
Refractory 
Engineering Division 

J. E. Kelly 
(Non-Executive Director) 

Secretary and registered office:
Mrs. J. L. Martin, L.L.B., A.C.I.S.
Ivy House Foundry, Hanley,
Stoke-on-Trent, ST1 3NR

Registrar and share transfer office: 
Computershare Investor Services PLC, 
The Pavilions, Bridgwater Road, 
Bristol, BS99 6ZZ 

Auditor: 
RSM UK Audit LLP, 
Festival Way, Festival Park, Stoke-on-Trent, ST1 5BB 

NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the EIGHTY-EIGHTH ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING of the 
Company will be held at 10.30am on Friday, 29th September, 2023 at Crewe Hall, Weston 
Road, Crewe, Cheshire CW1 6UZ for the purpose of considering and, if thought fit, passing 
the following resolutions which are proposed as ordinary resolutions. 

  1.

  2.
  3.

  4.

To receive the Directors’ Reports and the audited financial statements for the year 
ended 30th April, 2023. 
To approve the payment of the proposed ordinary dividend on the ordinary shares. 
To approve the Directors' Remuneration Report (excluding the Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy) for the year ended 30th April, 2023, as stated on pages 34 to 38 of the Directors' 
Report. 
To re-appoint RSM UK Audit LLP as auditor and to authorise the Directors to determine 
their remuneration. 

By Order of the Board 

Registered Office: 
Ivy House Foundry, 
Hanley, Stoke-on-Trent 
7th August, 2023

J. L. Martin 
Secretary 

1

 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO NOTICE OF ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING: 

1. Members are entitled to appoint a proxy to exercise all or any of their rights to attend and to speak and vote on 
their behalf at the meeting. A shareholder may appoint more than one proxy in relation to the Annual General 
Meeting provided that each proxy is appointed to exercise the rights attached to a different share or shares held 
by that shareholder. A proxy need not be a shareholder of the Company. A proxy form which may be used to 
make such appointment and give proxy instructions accompanies this notice. 

2. To  be  valid  any  proxy  form  or  other  instrument  appointing  a  proxy  must  be  received  by  post,  by  scanned   
copy sent to proxies@goodwingroup.com or (during normal business hours only) by hand at Ivy House Foundry, 
Hanley, Stoke-on-Trent, ST1 3NR no later than 10.30am on 27th September, 2023. 

3. The return of a completed proxy form or other such instrument will not prevent a shareholder attending the  

Annual General Meeting and voting in person if he/she wishes to do so.  

4. Any person, to whom this notice is sent, who is a person nominated under section 146 of the Companies Act 
2006 to enjoy information rights (a “Nominated Person”) may, under an agreement between him/her and the 
shareholder by whom he/she was nominated, have a right to be appointed (or to have someone else appointed) 
as a proxy for the Annual General Meeting. If a Nominated Person has no such proxy appointment right or does 
not wish to exercise it, he/she may, under any such agreement, have a right to give instructions to the shareholder 
as to the exercise of voting rights. 

5. The statement of the rights of shareholders in relation to the appointment of proxies in paragraphs 1 and 2 above 
does  not  apply  to  Nominated  Persons.  The  rights  described  in  these  paragraphs  can  only  be  exercised  by   
shareholders of the Company.  

6. To be entitled to attend and vote at the Annual General Meeting (and for the purpose of the determination by  
the Company of the votes they may cast), shareholders must be registered in the Register of Members of the 
Company at 10.30am on 27th September, 2023 (or, in the event of any adjournment, 10.30am on the date which 
is two days before the time of the adjourned meeting). Changes to the Register of Members after the relevant  
deadline shall be disregarded in determining the rights of any person to attend and vote at the meeting. 

7. As at 4th August, 2023 (being the last business day prior to the publication of this Notice) the Company’s issued 
share capital consists of 7,509,600 ordinary shares, carrying one vote each. Therefore, the total voting rights in 
the Company as at 4th August, 2023 are 7,509,600. 

8. Shareholders should note that it is possible that, pursuant to requests made by shareholders of the Company 
under section 527 of the Companies Act 2006, the Company may be required to publish on a website a statement 
setting out any matter relating to: (i) the audit of the Company’s accounts (including the auditor’s report and the 
conduct of the audit) that are to be laid before the Annual General Meeting; or (ii) any circumstance connected 
with an auditor of the Company ceasing to hold office since the previous meeting at which annual accounts and 
reports were laid in accordance with section 437 of the Companies Act 2006. The Company may not require the 
shareholders requesting any such website publication to pay its expenses in complying with sections 527 or 528 
of the Companies Act 2006. Where the Company is required to place a statement on a website under section 527 
of the Companies Act 2006, it must forward the statement to the Company’s auditor not later than the time when 
it makes the statement available on the website. The business which may be dealt with at the Annual General 
Meeting includes any statement that the Company has been required under section 527 of the Companies Act 
2006 to publish on a website. 

9.

In order to facilitate voting by corporate representatives at the meeting, arrangements will be put in place at  
the meeting so that (i) if a corporate shareholder has appointed the chairman of the meeting as its corporate  
representative with instructions to vote on a poll in accordance with the directions of all of the other corporate 
representatives for that shareholder at the meeting, then on a poll those corporate representatives will give  
voting directions to the chairman and the chairman will vote (or withhold a vote) as corporate representative in 
accordance with those directions; and (ii) if more than one corporate representative for the same corporate  
shareholder attends the meeting but the corporate shareholder has not appointed the chairman of the meeting 
as its corporate representative, a designated corporate representative will be nominated, from those corporate 
representatives who attend, who will vote on a poll and the other corporate representatives will give voting  
directions to that designated corporate representative. Corporate shareholders are referred to the guidance issued 
by The Chartered Governance Institute on proxies and corporate representatives (www.icsa.org.uk) for further 
details of this procedure. The guidance includes a sample form of representation letter if the chairman is being 
appointed as described in (i) above. 

10. None of the Directors has a service contract with the Company. 

11. If approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 29th September, 2023, the ordinary dividends of  
115p per share will be payable in equal instalments of 57.5p per share on 6th October, 2023 and on or around 
12th April, 2024 to shareholders on the register on 15th September, 2023 and on or around 22nd March, 2024  
respectively.

2

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

GOODWIN PLC 

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT 

The “Trading” pre-tax profit for the Group for the twelve month period ended 30th April, 
2023, was £18.9 million (2022: £17.2 million) an increase of 10% on revenue of £186 million 
(2022: £144 million).    Trading  profit  for  this  purpose  is  defined  as  the  Group  pre-tax   
reported profit of £22.1 million less the positive impact of our interest rate swap, having  
increased  in  value  by  a  further  £3.2  million.    The  £3.2  million  movement  relates  to  the   
30th April, 2023 valuation of our £30 million interest rate swap derivative that expires in  
August 2031, whereby we have fixed our interest rate on £30 million of debt for ten years  
at less than 1% for a ten year term.  We described in the Chairman’s statement within last 
years  Annual  Report  why  the  movements  in  valuation  of  the  interest  rate  swap  shall  be   
excluded, as well as being excluded for dividend purposes.  

The Directors propose an increased dividend of 115p (2022: 107.80p) per share. 

For the financial year ending on 30th April 2023, the Group has demonstrated substantial 
progression in its transformation, particularly noted in the handling of increased workload.  
There was a significant 68% increase in order intake compared to the last year, predominantly 
at Goodwin Steel Castings Limited and Goodwin International Limited, contributing to the 
start  of  the  rebound  of  our  Mechanical  Engineering  Division,  which  had  experienced   
challenges in recent years.  As of the date of the current report, the Group’s cumulative  
future orders stand at record £271 million. 

Mechanical Engineering Division  

Whilst  there  has  been  some  resurgence  for  petrochemical  valves  for  new  LNG  projects 
around the world, due to energy uncertainty from current world events, assisting our valve 
manufacturing  companies,  it  is  the  combined  package  that  our  foundry,  Goodwin  Steel   
Castings  and  the  precision  project  engineering  facility  Goodwin  International  offers,   
which has led to the largest part of new orders shown in the Group workload, with them  
being primarily for the nuclear decommissioning and naval markets. 

Due to the work that these two businesses have excelled at, whilst diversifying away from 
their mainstay of petrochemical-based work a decade ago, be it discrete orders or orders  
that combine the skillset of the organisations, the future looks bright.  The programmes of 
work,  that  are  actively  ramping  up  now,  are  being  exploited  to  win  more  and  more  of   
the same, supporting projects that will still be ongoing in a decade's time.  

A  lot  of  this  work  has  only  been  possible  as  a  result  of  the  significant  investment  into   
Goodwin  Steel  Castings  over  recent  years.    We  focused  on  what  needed  to  be  done  to   
become one of the West’s large casting suppliers of choice for large technically advanced  
castings  that  we  are  manufacturing  now.    These  investments  look  set  to  repay  the  faith   
the  Board  had  in  the  company  and  after  a  long  drought,  they  should  now  meaningfully   
contribute to the Group’s performance going forward. 

The supply of heavy duty submersible pumps, primarily to the mining industry, is 19% up  
on last year. The pump companies in India, Brazil, Australia and South Africa continue to  
convert  customers  from  competitors’  pumps  that  are  not  as  reliable  and  robust  as  the   
Goodwin pump, which is specifically designed for the most demanding applications.  In the 
year,  a  new  hydraulically  powered  variant  of  our  submersible  slurry  pump  that  can  be 
mounted  directly  on  10  –  30  tonne  excavators,  driven  by  the  excavator’s  hydraulics,   
was launched.  The addition of this hydraulic pump opens up a new market area (Heavy  
Construction)  in  terms  of  customers  and  applications  that  will  complement  the  natural   
growth  that  is  expected  for  the  electrically  driven  pumps.    It  will  be  a  distributor-based   
market  with  the  pump  being  marketed  as  an  excavator  accessory,  thus  allowing  all  the   

3

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT (continued)

existing  pump  companies,  that  are  profitable,  to  bolt  on  a  complementary  product  with   
minimal increases in overheads, all for applications that do not compete with our existing 
pump business.  

Duvelco,  the  Group’s  latest  and  largest  investment  into  a  new  business  area,  which  will   
facilitate  the  production  of  high  operational  temperature  polyimide  polymer  resins,   
is on course to be completed in line with our previously disclosed timeline.  Commercial  
operation of our initial plant is expected to occur prior to June 2024.  As soon as production 
material  is  available,  the  team  will  look  to  commence  gaining  sales  traction  and  break   
into this new market sector for the Group. 

It has been a good year with real progress being made.  The Division has adeptly navigated 
contract  and  customer  management  challenges  across  all  sectors,  with  the  overall   
divisional profitability up 33% on an increased turnover of 41%. 

Refractory Engineering Division 

In the year there have been two major notable successes.  The first major achievement has 
occurred  at  Brassington  in  Derbyshire,  where  the  team  at  Hoben  International  Limited   
(Hoben)  has  successfully  installed  and  commissioned  a  second  calciner.    The  calciner   
supplies  one  of  the  key  raw  materials  for  the  investment  casting  powder,  and  as  such,   
the  installation  not  only  enables  the  Division  to  continue  to  grow,  but  has  provided  the   
Division  with  a  level  of  business  continuity  that  we  never  had  the  benefit  of  before.   
In  order  to  increase  capacity  to  accommodate  continued  growth  in  ground  silica  sales,   
a  third  ball  mill  is  in  the  process  of  being  installed  and  is  planned  to  be  commissioned   
before the end of the calendar year.  

The second success relates to Dupré Minerals Limited (Dupré), which supplies a range of  
refractory products that typically contain vermiculite.  During the year the Company has 
achieved record trading profits by increasing its profitability by over 50%.  The Company  
has  maximised  its  position  through  the  supply  of  its  traditional  products  as  well  as   
growing its newer products.  The energy crisis brought on by the Ukraine conflict has led  
to  a  surge  in  the  number  of  wood  stoves  being  installed,  for  which  Dupré  supplies  the   
internal vermiculite insulation boards.   

In addition to the supply of boards, Dupré’s internally developed product, known as AVD  
that addresses the burning issues surrounding lithium-ion battery fires has taken a step  
forward.  The momentum in sales is starting to provide a respectable contribution to the 
Group’s  profits.    AVD  extinguishing  agent  and  fire  extinguishers  are  now  being  sold  in   
over  forty  five  countries  with  additional  distributors  being  appointed  in  new  territories   
on  a  regular  basis.    In  recent  weeks  Underwriters  Laboratory  (UL)  certification  for   
component  recognition  of  AVD  as  an  extinguishing  agent  and  certification  of  a  six  litre   
fire  extinguisher  containing  AVD  to  UL8  has  now  been  obtained.    This  is  a  significant   
milestone  for  opening  up  sales  into  the  USA  and  other  global  markets  that  require  UL   
Certification and it has been pleasing to see that the order input via multiple sources for  
AVD in the first two months of this financial year was equal to more than the last half of  
2023.  Expansion of the AVD manufacturing capacity is planned in the coming year. 

Sales  of  jewellery  investment  powder,  moulding  rubber  and  injection  waxes  have   
remained strong within the year.  Final customer approvals for X-Sil respirable silica free  
investment  powder  are  in  their  final  stages  at  key  reference  customers  in  the  USA  and   
Europe.  This has been a long process which should start to generate sales in the coming  
year.  India remains the key growth country for jewellery production around the world and  
in  order  to  increase  production  capacity  for  both  investment  powder  and  injection  wax   
production in India a newly constructed larger production facility will be completed and  
commissioned within the current financial year. 

4

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

Carbon Reduction Activities 

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT (continued)

Over  the  course  of  the  year,  the  Group  has  continued  working  on  its  carbon  neutral   
programme  and  has  spent  a  further  £2  million  on  renewables,  specifically  solar  panels   
where the power generated will be utilised on site.  In total, the Group has now completed 
sixteen  of  the  twenty  two  individual  electricity  projects  that  were  initially  targeted,   
which  includes  the  installation  of  5.7  MWp  of  solar  panels.    The  results  of  this  will   
reduce  the  Group's  electricity  purchased  from  the  national  grid  by  over  24.7%  per  year, 
amounting to savings of over £1 million per year, providing a reduction of 1,365 tonnes  
equivalent  of  carbon  dioxide  (CO2)  per  year.    As  noted  in  last  year’s  Annual  Report,  the   
remaining  projects  are  being  held  up  by  the  District  Network  Operator.    Once  this   
permission,  along  with  planning  permission  where  required,  has  been  obtained  there  is   
potential to install a further 10MW of solar panels across our sites.  Over half of this will  
be  based  at  Hoben  in  Derbyshire  where  we  intend  to  also  apply  for  planning  for  two   
2.5MW wind turbines.  The power generated from these installations will be fully utilised  
by the Group and will not be exported back to the grid. 

Two other major components of the carbon neutral programme are the conversion of our  
4MW/hr  natural  gas  burners  on  both  calciners  at  Hoben  to  hydrogen  and  offsetting  our   
CO2 footprint, that cannot be eliminated in its entirety without ceasing operation.  Despite 
two  unsuccessful  grant  applications  to  BEIS  to  mitigate  the  very  high  cost  of  the   
electrolysis  machine  required  to  make  onsite  green  hydrogen,  we  are  continuing  to   
pursue  government  support,  as  the  Group’s  carbon  neutral  target  heavily  depends  on   
finding  an  alternative  to  burning  natural  gas.    However,  for  all  other  gas  processes  that   
cannot  be  converted,  the  company  has  purchased  a  new  1,180  acre  plot  of  land  that  is   
ideally  suited  for  planting  560,000  broad  leaf  trees.    The  planting  scheme  will  be  one   
of the largest in the UK and over the next fifty five years will offset an average of 2,168  
tonnes  of  CO2  per  year,  which  for  example,  covers  100%  of  the  CO2  emissions  that  are   
generated at the foundry from burning natural gas, as well as being able to offset other  
subsidiary gas burning processes. 

Cashflow  

The  significant  increase  in  order  input  and  the  downpayments  associated  with  these   
orders,  coupled  with  the  not  insignificant  levels  of  non-cash  depreciation  charges   
(£8  million)  that  occur  annually,  provided  the  Group  with  a  very  strong  cash  generation   
in the year ended 30th April, 2023.  Notwithstanding the £23 million of capital expenditure 
that  has  occurred  in  the  year,  the  Group's  net  debt  reduced  to  finish  at  £33  million   
which  equates  to  a  modest  gearing  of  26.3%.    The  major  areas  of  expenditure  relate  to   
the  second  calciner,  Duvelco  polymer  production  plant  and  extending  the  melt  shop  at   
the foundry to enable a greater level of production capacity.  Furthermore, the initial costs  
in  relation  to  a  new  7,690sqm  building  in  India,  for  which  the  Board  had  approved  the   
investment, due to both the refractory and pump businesses reaching capacity within the  
existing facility, were also incurred in the year ending 30th April, 2023. 

With  the  growth  that  is  expected  in  the  years  to  come,  the  Group  has  recently  renewed   
a £10 million revolving credit facility.  This is as well as securing an additional £25 million  
of  committed  banking  facilities  on  effectively  a  four  year  term,  as  a  prudent  policy  to   
ensure  that  guaranteed  facilities  and  the  appropriate  level  of  headroom  is  available  to   
the  Group,  should  it  ever  be  required.    The  total  value  of  our  facilities  now  available  to   
fund the Group is £75.5 million, of which at the year end we were only utilising 48%. 

In  line  with  the  activity,  the  Group’s  employee  numbers  are  starting  to  increase.    Our   
apprenticeship programme continues to insulate the Group from the skills shortages that  
exists  in  the  local  area.    To  date,  a  total  of  three  hundred  apprentices  have  completed   

5

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT (continued)

the course at the Training Centre, with the vast majority of them now working within the  
subsidiaries  and  the  Group’s  twelfth  cohort  of  thirty  apprentices  will  be  starting  in   
September 2023. 

In March 2023, John Connolly, who had been the Group Chief Accountant and a Director of 
Goodwin PLC for sixteen years, retired.  He had worked for the Goodwin Group for over 
twenty  seven  years  and  the  Board  takes  the  opportunity  of  thanking  him  for  his  hard   
work  and  loyalty  over  the  years,  which  helped  move  the  Group  forward.    We  wish  him   
much happiness in his retirement.  We are also pleased to report that Adam Deeth has been 
brought on board as a highly capable replacement for the Group Chief Accountant role.   

We  are  once  again  extremely  grateful  to  our  UK  and  overseas  directors,  managers  and   
employees for their hard work in driving forward the performance of the Group. 

7th August, 2023

T. J. W. Goodwin 
Chairman 

Alternative performance measures mentioned above are defined on page 104. 

6

 
  
 
 
 
 
GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

GOODWIN PLC
SUMMARY OF CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS 

for the year ended 30th April, 2023

Notes

2023

£’000

2022

£’000 

CONTINUING OPERATIONS

Revenue … … … … … … … … … …

3, 4

185,742

Cost of sales

… … … … … … … … …

(139,521)

GROSS PROFIT… … … … … … … … … …
Distribution expenses … … … … … … … …

Administrative expenses

… … … … … … …

OPERATING PROFIT … … … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … …

Finance costs (net)

Share of profit of associate company

… … … … …

7

14

46,221

(3,741)

(22,167)

20,313

(1,438)

65

144,108 

(101,404) 

42,704 

(3,743) 

(20,654) 

18,307 

(1,169) 

63 

TRADING PROFIT … … … … … … … … …

18,940

17,201 

Additional year on year unrealised gain on 

10 year interest rate swap derivative… … … … … …

3,189

2,740 

PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION

… … … … … … …

Tax on profit*  … … … … … … … … …

5

8

22,129

(5,616)

19,941 

(6,321) 

PROFIT AFTER TAXATION… … … … … … … …

16,513

13,620 

ATTRIBUTABLE TO:

Equity holders of the parent  … … … … … … …

Non-controlling interests 

… … … … … … …

15,904

609

12,980 

640 

PROFIT FOR THE YEAR … … … … … … … …

16,513

13,620 

BASIC EARNINGS PER ORDINARY SHARE (in pence)** … …

DILUTED EARNINGS PER ORDINARY SHARE (in pence) … …

9

9

206.81p

169.14p 

206.81p

169.14p

* The Group has received significant benefit from the UK superdeduction capital allowances programme, that  
has substantially reduced the corporation tax payable in the UK. For further details, see the additonal commentary 
in note 8.

The full financial statements and accompanying notes are on pages 48 to 104.

7

 
 
 
GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

OBJECTIVES, STRATEGY AND BUSINESS MODEL 

The Group’s main OBJECTIVE and PURPOSE is to have a sustainable long-term engineering 
based business with good potential for profitable growth while providing a fair return to our  
shareholders.  

The Board’s VALUES of engineering excellence, quality, efficiency, reliability, competitive price 
and delivery contribute to the delivery of its strategy. 

The Board’s STRATEGY to achieve this is: 
(cid:129) to  supply  a  range  of  technically  advanced  products  to  growth  markets  in  the  Mechanical   
Engineering and Refractory Engineering segments in which we have built up a global reputation 
for engineering excellence, quality, efficiency, reliability, competitive price and delivery;  

(cid:129) to manufacture advanced technical products profitably, efficiently and economically; 
(cid:129) to  maintain  an  ongoing  programme  of  investment  in  plant,  facilities,  sales  and  marketing,   
research  and  development  with  a  view  to  increasing  efficiency,  reducing  costs,  increasing   
performance, delivering better products for our customers, expanding our global customer  
base  and  keeping  us  at  the  forefront  of  technology  within  our  markets,  whilst  at  all  times   
taking appropriate steps to ensure the health and safety of our employees and customers;  
(cid:129) to control our working capital and investment programme to ensure a safe level of gearing; 
(cid:129) to maintain a strong capital base to retain investor, customer, creditor and market confidence 

and so help sustain future development of the business; 

(cid:129) to support a local presence and a local workforce in order to stay close to our customers; 
(cid:129) to invest in training and development of skills for the Group’s future; 
(cid:129) to  manage  the  environmental  and  social  impacts  of  our  business  to  support  its  long-term   

sustainability. 

BUSINESS MODEL 

The Group’s focus is on manufacturing within two sectors, Mechanical Engineering and Refractory 
Engineering, and through this division of our manufacturing activities, our overseas business  
facilities and our global sales and marketing activities, the Group benefits from market diversity. 
Further details of our business and products are shown on our website www.goodwin.co.uk. 
Mechanical Engineering 

The  Group  specialises  in  supplying  precision  engineered  solutions  and  industrial  goods  into   
critical  applications,  generally  on  a  project  basis,  more  often  than  not  involving  the   
complementary  skill  set  of  other  group  companies  to  deliver  the  requirement.    The  projects   
normally involve international procurement, high integrity castings, forgings or wrought high  
alloy steels, carbon fibre composite structures, precision CNC machining, complex welding and 
fabrication, and other operations as are required. In addition to specialist projects, the Group  
manufactures and sells a wide range of dual plate check valves, axial nozzle check valves and  
axial piston control and isolation valves.  These solutions and products typically form part of  
large  construction  projects,  including  the  construction  of  naval  vessels,  nuclear  waste   
treatment, nuclear power generation, liquefied natural gas (LNG), gas, oil, petrochemical, mining, 
and water markets.  

We  generate  value  by  creating  leading  edge  technology  designs,  globally  sourcing  the  best   
quality raw material at good prices, manufacturing in highly efficient facilities using up to date 
technology to provide very reliable products to the required specification, at competitive prices 
and with timely deliveries. 

The Group through its foundry, Goodwin Steel Castings Limited, has the capability to pour high 
performance  alloy  castings  up  to  35  tonnes,  radiograph  and  also  finish  CNC  machine  and   
fabricate them at the foundry’s sister company, Goodwin International Limited.  This capability is 
targeting the defence industry and nuclear decommissioning, the oil and gas industry, as well  
as large, global projects requiring high integrity machined castings.   

Goodwin  International  Limited,  the  largest  company  in  the  Mechanical  Engineering  Division,   
not only designs and manufactures dual plate check valves, axial nozzle check valves and axial 
piston  control  and  isolation  valves  but  also  undertakes  specialised  CNC  machining  and   
fabrication  work  for  nuclear  decommissioning  projects.  Goodwin  International  Limited  also   

8

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

OBJECTIVES, STRATEGY AND BUSINESS MODEL (continued)

has  a  division  that  is  focused  on  manufacturing  /  machining  high  precision,  high  integrity   
components  for  naval  marine  vessels.  Noreva  GmbH  also  designs,  manufactures  and  sells   
axial  nozzle  check  valves.    Both  Goodwin  International  Limited  and  Noreva  GmbH  purchase   
the  majority  of  the  value  of  their  sand  mould  castings  from  Goodwin  Steel  Castings  Limited   
for their ranges of check valves and this vertical integration gives rise to competitive benefits,  
increased efficiencies and timely deliveries. 

At  Goodwin  Pumps  India  Private  Limited  we  manufacture  a  superior  range  of  submersible   
slurry pumps for end users in India, Brazil, Australia and Africa. Easat Radar Systems Limited  
and its subsidiary, NRPL Aero Oy, design and build bespoke high-performance radar surveillance 
systems for the global market of major defence contractors, civil aviation authorities and coastal 
border  security  agencies.    Easat  has  a  sister  company,  Easat  Radar  Systems  India  Private   
Limited, that also manufactures, sells and maintains radar systems.  We create value on these by 
innovative design, assembly and testing in our own facilities using bought in or engineered in-
house components. 
Refractory Engineering 

Within the Refractory Engineering Division, Goodwin Refractory Services Limited (GRS) generates 
value primarily from designing, manufacturing and selling investment casting powders, injection 
moulding  rubbers  and  waxes  to  the  jewellery  casting  industry.    GRS  also  manufactures  and   
sells these products to the tyre mould and aerospace industries.  The Refractory Engineering  
Division  has  five  other  investment  powder  manufacturing  companies  located  in  China,  India   
and Thailand which sell the casting powders directly and through distributors to the jewellery 
casting industry and also directly to tyre mould and aerospace industries. 

These companies are vertically integrated with another of our UK companies, Hoben International 
Limited  (Hoben),  which  manufactures  cristobalite,  which  it  sells  to  the  six  casting  powder   
manufacturing  companies  as  well  as  producing  ground  silica  that  also  goes  into  casting   
powders and other UK uses of silica.  Hoben now also manufactures different grades of perlite, 
and  a  patented  range  of  biodegradable  bags,  known  as  Soluform,  for  use  inside  traditional   
hessian / jute bags for the placement of concrete in or around rivers.  

The  other  UK  refractory  company  is  Dupré  Minerals  Limited  (Dupré)  which  focuses  on   
producing  exfoliated  vermiculite  that  is  used  in  insulation,  brake  linings  and  fire  protection   
products,  including  technical  textiles  that  can  withstand  exposure  to  high  temperatures.     
Dupré  also  sells  consumable  refractories  to  the  shell  moulding  precision  casting  industry.     
Dupré  has  designed,  patented  and  is  now  selling  a  range  of  fire  extinguishers  and  an   
extinguishing  agent  for  lithium-ion  battery  fires  that  utilises  a  vermiculite  dispersion  as  the   
fire extinguishing agent. 

9

OBJECTIVES, STRATEGY AND BUSINESS MODEL (continued)

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

BUSINESS DIVERSITY AND PERFORMANCE 

As  can  be  seen  in  note  3  to  these  financial   
statements,  in  the  year  to  30th  April,  2023  the   
operating  profits  of  the  Group  increased  11%   
year on year.  With the Mechanical Engineering  
Division  having  generated  49%  of  the  Group’s   
operating  profit  and  the  Refractory  Engineering   
Division having generated 51%. The split between 
the divisions remains largely unchanged due to 
the ongoing success of the Refractory Engineering 
Division  as  sales  of  its  core  products  continued   
to  be  buoyant  throughout  the  year,  especially 
within  the  Indian  investment  casting  powder   
market  which  is  supplied  by  our  factory  in   
Chennai. 

Furthermore, whilst the Mechanical Engineering 
Division  revenue  has  increased  by  41%  in  the   
year,  its  operating  profit  has  increased  by  33%, 
which is a feature of the work starting to actively 
ramp up coupled with the initial lower levels of 
factory throughput that occurs at the beginning  
of  certain  long-term  programmes  whilst  the   
level  of 
customer  confirms 
assurance,  which  may  result 
in  contractual 
change orders being necessary. Looking forward, 
the  Board  continues  to  expect  the  split  in   
operating  profits  to  swing  back  to  a  60:40  split   
in favour of the Mechanical Engineering Division 
once the profits within these programmes starts 
to  flow  through.    This  is  despite  the  Refractory   
Engineering  Division  continuing  to  grow,  as  its 
newer product such as the AVD fire extinguishing 
agents start to become a material contributor. 

their  desired 

The  Group's  diversification  is  one  of  its  key 
strengths  that  over  the  years  has  insulated  it   
from  the  various  negative  events  that  have   
unfolded  and  impacted  specific  industries  as   
well as specific geographical markets.  The Group 
consists  of  21  operating  entities  that  are  based   
in 13 different counties, that in the year supplied 
52  technically  sophisticated  Mechanical  and 
Refractory products to more than 100 countries.  
Due to this the geographical segmentation report 
of the Group, as is reported on pages 64, remains 
relatively unchanged from the prior year with a 
fairly  even  spread.    Whilst  the  turnover  to  the   
USA only represents 11% of the Group’s turnover, 
it  has  increased  by  over  41%  versus  last  year, 
which principally relates to the increased supply 
of machined castings to the naval market, which 
will continue to grow over the next six years. 

10

 
 
 
GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

OBJECTIVES, STRATEGY AND BUSINESS MODEL (continued)

KEY PERFORMANCE INDICATORS 
The key performance indicators for the business are listed below:

The  alternative  performance  measures 
referred  to  above  are  defined  on  page  104.   
The  alternative  performance  measures  are   
important to management and the readers of 
the  Annual  Report  in  assessing  the  Group’s 
performance  and  benchmarking  it  within  its 
respective industries. 

* The calculation of Gross Profit is after taking 
into account plant depreciation, training, HR, 
R&D, sales, exhibition and sales travel costs, 
as well as the material and labour costs. 

11

 
GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

OBJECTIVES, STRATEGY AND BUSINESS MODEL (continued)

DIVIDEND AND CAPITAL EXPENDITURE POLICY 

The  Board  proposes  to  pay  a  dividend  of  115  pence  per  share,  up  7%  on  the  previous  year   
(2022: 107.80p).    The  proposed  dividend  has  been  calculated  using  the  Group’s  profit  after   
taxation figure, plus depreciation and amortisation for the year ending 30th April, 2023, after  
having  excluded  the  non-cash  £3.2  million  mark  to  market  unrealised  gain  relating  to  the   
ten year interest rate swap. 

In  line  with  expectations,  following  the  Group's  green  investments,  the  Group  finished  the   
year with a gearing of 26.3% (2022: 25.8%).  Due to the ongoing capital investment programme, 
the  Board  proposes  to  continue  to  smooth  the  Group’s  cash  flow  by  splitting  the  payment   
of the proposed ordinary dividends of 115 pence per share into equal instalments of 57.5 pence 
per  share  on  6th  October,  2023  and  on  or  around  12th  April,  2024  to  shareholders  on  the   
register on 15th September, 2023 and on or around 22nd March, 2024 respectively.

*Further details are included in the Alternative Performance Measures on page 104.

12

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES 

The Group's operations expose it to a variety of risks and uncertainties.  The Directors confirm that they have  
carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks the Company faced, including those that would threaten  
its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity. 

Market  risk:  The  Group  provides  a  range  of  products  and  services,  and  there  is  a  risk  that  the  demand  for   
these  products  and  services  will  vary  from  time  to  time  because  of  competitor  action  or  economic  cycles  or   
international  trade  friction  or  even  wars.    As  shown  in  note  3  to  the  financial  statements,  the  Group  operates   
across a range of geographical regions, and its turnover is split across the UK, Europe, USA, the Pacific Basin and 
the Rest of the World. 

Operating in many territories helps spread market risk.   Similarly, the Group operates in both Mechanical Engineering 
and Refractory Engineering sectors, mitigating the impact of a downturn in any one product area as has been  
seen in recent financial years. 

The potential risk of the loss of any key customer is limited as, typically, no single customer accounts for more  
than 10% of annual turnover.  

As  described  in  the  Business  Model,  the  Group  generates  significant  sales  from  nuclear  new  build  and   
decommissioning,  naval  propulsion  marine  applications  and  ship  hull  components  as  well  as  from  valves   
it  supplies  to  LNG,  oil,  chemical  and  water  markets.    The  Mechanical  Engineering  Division  also  sells   
submersible  pumps  that  are  supplied  to  the  mining  industries  and  radar  systems  that  are  used  for  civil  and   
defence  applications.    The  Refractory  Engineering  Division  sells  vermiculite  and  perlite  to  the  insulating  and   
fire prevention industry and our investment casting powder companies indirectly sell to the jewellery consumer  
market through the supply of investment casting moulding powders, waxes, silicone and natural rubber. 

Technical risk: The Group develops and launches new products as part of its strategy to enhance the long-term 
value of the Group. Such development projects carry business risks, including reputational risk, abortive expenditure 
and potential customer claims which may have a material impact on the Group.  The potential risk here is seen  
as manageable given the Group is developing products in areas in which it is knowledgeable and new products  
are tested as far as possible prior to their release into the market.  

Product failure / contractual risk: The risks that the Group supplies products that fail or are not manufactured  
to  specification  are  risks  that  all  manufacturing  companies  are  exposed  to  but  we  try  to  minimise  these  risks   
through the use of highly skilled personnel operating within robust quality control system environments, using  
third  party  accreditations  where  appropriate.    With  regard  to  the  risk  of  failure  in  relation  to  new  products   
coming on line, the additional risks here are minimised at the research and development stage, where prototype 
testing  and  the  deployment  of  a  robust  closed  loop  product  performance  quality  control  system  provides   
feedback  to  the  design  department  for  the  products  we  manufacture  and  sell.    The  risk  of  not  meeting  safety   
expectations,  or  causing  significant  adverse  impacts  to  customers  or  the  environment,  is  countered  by  the   
combination  of  the  controls  mentioned  within  this  section  and  the  purchase  of  product  liability  insurance.     
The risk of product obsolescence is countered by research and development investment. 

Supply  chain  and  equipment  risk:  Failure  of  a  major  supplier  or  essential  item  of  equipment  presents  a   
constant risk of disruption to the manufacturing in progress, especially in these times of high inflation associated 
with the conflict in the Ukraine.  Where reasonably possible, management mitigates and controls the risk with the 
use of dual sourcing, continual maintenance programmes, and by carrying adequate levels of stocks and spares  
to reduce any disruption. 

Health and safety: The Group’s operations involve the typical health and safety hazards inherent in manufacturing 
and business operations.  The Group is subject to numerous laws and regulations relating to health and safety 
around the world.  Hazards are managed by carrying out risk assessments and introducing appropriate controls,  
as well as attending safety training courses. 

Acquisitions: The Group’s growth plan over recent years has included a number of acquisitions.  There is the risk 
that these, or future acquisitions, fail to provide the planned value.  This risk is mitigated through financial and  
technical due diligence during the acquisition process and the Group’s inherent knowledge of the markets they  
operate in. 

Financial  risk:  The  principal  financial  risks  faced  by  the  Group  are  changes  in  market  prices  (interest  rates,   
foreign  exchange  rates  and  commodity  prices).    As  reported  elsewhere  within  these  financial  statements,  the   
Company,  on  2nd  July,  2021  signed  a  contract  to  mitigate  the  impact  of  interest  rate  risk  by  taking  out  an   
interest  rate  swap  derivative  fixing  £30  million  of  notional  debt  at  less  than  1%  versus  the  variable  SONIA   
rate  for  a  period  of  ten  years,  commencing  1st  September,  2021.    Detailed  information  on  the  financial  risk   
management objectives and policies is set out in note 28 to the financial statements.  The Group has in place  
risk  management  policies  that  seek  to  limit  the  adverse  effects  on  the  financial  performance  of  the  Group  by   
using  various  instruments  and  techniques,  including  credit  insurance,  stage  payments,  forward  foreign   
exchange contracts, secured and unsecured credit lines. 

Regulatory compliance: The Group’s operations are subject to a wide range of laws and regulations. Both within 
Goodwin PLC and its subsidiaries, the Directors and Senior Managers within the companies make best endeavours 
to ensure we comply with the relevant laws and regulations.  The Group ensures that high ethical standards and 
values are adopted, specifically with regards to anti-corruption, anti-bribery and human rights.  During the year, the 
Group has carried out enhanced sanctions training and updated internal policies to reflect the associated risks. 

13

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

PRINCIPAL RISKS AND UNCERTAINTIES (continued)

IT  security:  The  Group  performs  regular  and  remote  off  site  backups  of  its  IT  systems,  from  time  to  time   
engaging external companies to test and report any weaknesses and deficiencies found to enable solutions to  
be  put  in  place  to  mitigate  and  minimise  the  risk  of  an  IT  security  breach.    The  Group  is  in  the  process  of   
re-evaluating the need to invest further in this area over the next twelve months. 

Energy and Climate Change: The recent geopolitical tensions, with the current conflict in Ukraine, combined  
with the UK Government's energy policy over the last few years to reduce carbon emissions has left the country  
exposed  to  the  fragile  global  energy  system  which  has  driven  significant  increases  in  the  cost  of  power.   
Following the impact this has had on the Group earlier on in the year, the Group has amended its strategy to  
manage  the  risk  through  hedging  strategies,  incorporating  price  escalation  clauses  into  the  longer  term   
contracts,  aided  by  the  coming  on  stream  of  increasing  levels  of  low  cost  solar  power  around  the  Group.     
Furthermore,  the  Group  has  successfully  completed  sixteen  of  the  twenty  two  individual  electricity  projects   
that  were  initially  targeted,  which  include  the  installation  of  5.7  MW  of  solar  panels.    The  results  of  this  will   
reduce the Group's electricity purchased from the national grid by over 24.7% per year, amounting to savings  
of over £1 million per year as compared to buying electricity from the grid.

14

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY

The  Board  as  a  whole  is  responsible  for  decisions  relating  to  the  long-term  success  of  the  Company  and  the   
way in which their duties have been discharged during the year in terms of the strategic, operational and risk  
management decisions and these can be found within the Strategic Report on pages 8 to 14. 
As set out below and in line with Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006, through engagement the interests and 
views of the Group’s employees and other stakeholders are considered by the Board within its decision-making  
process as well as the impact they have on the environment, our reputation and the surrounding communities.   
During  the  year,  unless  otherwise  stated,  the  principal  decision  made  in  the  year,  impacting  its  stakeholders,   
other  than  routine  decisions  that  are  made  on  a  year-on-year  basis  as  part  of  running  the  business,  was  the   
renewal and increase of its banking facilities, as well as approval to proceed with a tender offer.  For further details, 
see page 90. 
Non-Financial and Sustainability Information Statement  
As per the latest disclosure requirement, under the Companies Regulations 2022, that came into effect this year,  
disclosures on Climate related financial disclosures, Company’s employees, community issues, social matters, 
human rights and anti-corruption and bribery can be found on pages 15 to 17 of the Annual Report. 
Employees  
Health and Safety: The Group acknowledges that many of its manufacturing processes and some materials that  
it handles and sells are hazardous and that providing a safe environment for people at all of our facilities is an  
unconditional  priority  for  all  of  those  charged  with  governance,  in  addition  to  each  member  of  the  workforce.     
In  the  year,  as  operations  change,  the  Group  has  managed  the  continually  evolving  risks  that  are  inherent  in   
manufacturing businesses by ensuring risk assessments are carried out by all departments and as soon as an  
operational change is envisaged.  Such assessments enable the introduction of the appropriate controls to help  
ensure  that  the  workforce  is  protected  from  foreseeable  hazards.    Furthermore,  awareness  and  training  to   
continually reduce risk and improve safety is a mind-set that is reinforced on a daily basis through the Group’s  
global “Safety Spectrum” programme. 
Employee  consultation:  The  Group  takes  seriously  its  responsibilities  to  employees  and,  as  a  policy,  provides   
employees  systematically  with  information  on  matters  of  concern  to  them.    It  is  also  the  policy  of  the  Group   
to  consult  where  appropriate,  on  an  annual  basis,  with  employees  or  their  representatives  so  that  their  views   
may  be  taken  into  account  in  making  decisions  likely  to  affect  their  interests.    The  Board  considers  the  most   
effective  form  of  engagement  and  involvement  of  its  employees  for  its  size  and  complexity  is  by  way  of   
informal daily discussions between the employees, the Senior Management and Board members who walk the  
floor, and the Company encourages its employees through its salary and bonus arrangements.  Engagement in  
the year is further supported through workforce representative meetings, local working groups, team meetings, 
training, and an honest and open culture. 
Employment of disabled persons: The policy of the Group is to offer the same opportunity, including training,  
development and promotion, to disabled people, and those who become disabled, as to all others in respect of  
recruitment  and  career  advancement,  provided  their  disability  does  not  prevent  them  from  carrying  out  the   
duties required of them in accordance with the requirements of the Equality Act 2010.  
Diversity Policy: The Group is committed to promoting diversity of gender, social and ethnic backgrounds and  
personal  strengths,  in  addition  to  ensuring  that  everyone  has  the  same  opportunities  for  employment  and   
promotion  based  on  ability,  qualifications  and  suitability  for  the  work  in  question.    The  Group  invests  in   
training and development of skills for the Group’s future and has a long-term aim that the composition of our  
workforce should reflect that of the community it serves.  The Group continues to strive to improve the balance  
of  diversity  by  reviewing  gender  reporting  and  promoting  diversity  through  training  and  development,   
recruitment, our business culture and the Board’s Strategy.  Whilst the senior independent directorship is held  
by Jennifer Kelly, following the assessment that was carried out on 30th April, 2023 the Board does not comply  
fully with the latest listing requirements that have come into effect in the year, which require 40% of the Board  
to  be  female  and  for  at  least  one  Board  member  to  be  from  an  ethnic  minority  background.    Whilst  we  fully   
acknowledge  the  necessity  and  benefits  of  a  diversified  leadership,  we  are  unable  to  currently  meet  these   
specific targets due to the Board consisting of primarily executive Directors because of its size and complexity,  
as set out on page 22.  This coupled with the fact that the appointments of the Board are made with the utmost  
consideration for the individual's qualifications, experience, and ability to contribute to the strategic direction of  
the  Company,  we  have  found  ourselves  at  present,  based  on  these  criteria,  unable  to  make  the  necessary   
adjustments  without  compromising  the  integrity  and  efficiency  of  our  Board.    Nonetheless,  we  are  examining   
ways  of  meeting  these  requirements  over  the  long-term  by  continuing  to  promote  diversity  at  all  levels  of   
the  Company,  whilst  also  maintaining  the  Board’s  dynamism  and  the  required  level  of  experience,  ability  and   
qualifications.

15

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (continued)

Diversity Policy: (continued)
The following tables set out the breakdown of our average number of employees and Board members by gender 
and age:

Breakdown by gender

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Company Secretary Management 

Main Board and

Senior

Employees

Total 

Number of female employees

Number of male employees

Total number of employees

% of female employees

% of male employees

Breakdown by age

2

5

7

29%

71%

14

69

83

17%

83%

190

864

1,054

18%

82%

206 

938 

1,144 

18% 

82%

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Company Secretary Management 

Main Board and

Senior

Employees

Total 

Number of employees aged 16-21

Number of employees aged 22-40

Number of employees aged 41-65

Number of employees aged over 65

Total employees

% aged 16-21

% aged 22-40

% aged 41-65

% aged over 65

-

4

3

-

7

-

57%

43%

-

-

11

65

7

83

-

13%

79%

8%

81

496

456

21

81 

511 

524 

28 

1,054

1,144 

8%

47%

43%

2%

7% 

45% 

46% 

2%

Suppliers, Customers and Regulatory Authorities  
The  Board  considers  market  trends  regularly  and  reviews  their  likely  long-term  implications.    Our  business   
relationships  and  procedures  are  developed  over  time  and  are  regularly  reviewed  to  ensure  as  a  Group  we   
conduct  business  responsibly  and  sustainably.    The  Board  acquires  a  first-hand  understanding  of  its  business   
relationships through regular dialogue and site visits where appropriate.  Engagement is ensured from the initial 
tender processes to embedded sales and engineering project meetings and reinforced by an open door culture, 
whilst actively seeking feedback.   
The five Executive Directors of the Board are actively involved with the day to day business and management of  
the subsidiaries thereby allowing a good understanding of key members of the supply chain and also ensuring  
a fair purchase culture. 

Maintaining High Standards of Business Conduct  
Ethics and Sustainability: We are committed to conducting business responsibly and ethically.  We endeavour  
to ensure that our staff, suppliers and business partners adopt the same or similar high ethical standards and  
values.  This applies, but is not limited to human rights, modern slavery, anti-bribery and corruption and is all  
enhanced  by  an  anonymous  whistle-blowing  system,  which  is  rountinely  reviewed  and  independently   
investigated if required. 

Shareholders: Shareholder engagement occurs through the Annual Report, regulatory disclosures, our website, site 
visits and the Annual General Meeting, coupled by supplementary RNS announcements made during the course  
of the year.  Throughout the year, the Chairman, on behalf of the Group, maintains an active dialogue with its  
shareholders, in order to understand their views on governance and performance against the strategy, as well  
as  providing  its  investors,  including  institutional  investors,  an  opportunity  to  ask  questions,  discuss  the   
performance  of  the  Group  and  make  suggestions.    Further  engagement  is  obtained  through  shareholder  site   
visits, which are hosted directly by the Chairman and the other members of the main Board.  The Board aims to  
accommodate such requests as and when they are appropriate to do so.  The Group’s Non-Executive Director  
is also available before and after at the Annual General Meeting to discuss any matters shareholders might wish  
to  raise.    Such  regular  first-hand  engagement  with  shareholders  enables  the  Chairman  to  provide  the  Board   
with updates so the views of shareholders are taken into consideration. 
The Company has one class of ordinary shares, which have the same rights as regards voting, distributions and  
on liquidation.  Management are also significant shareholders in the Company, holding approximately 52.74%  
(2022: 52.48%) of the register.  In accordance with LR6.5, there is a controlling shareholder agreement in place.   
Executive directors M.S. Goodwin, S.R. Goodwin, B.R. Goodwin and T.J.W. Goodwin are party to the controlling 
shareholders agreement, as well as Audit Committee members, J.W. Goodwin and R.S. Goodwin.  On this basis  
the Board feels that the Executive Directors are fully aligned with shareholders. 

16

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (continued)

Communities:  During  the  year  the  Group  has  continued  to  communicate  to  all  employees  our  culture  of   
responsibility  and  support  for  local  communities  where  possible.    The  Board  encourages  its  sites  to  support   
their local communities through charitable activities and initiatives to support the local area within which they  
operate.  Engagement occurs through dialogue with the local councils and charities. 
Donations: The Group made no political donations during the year (2022: £nil). Donations by the Group for charitable  
purposes amounted to £91,000 (2022: £71,000).  The majority of these were made to local communities within  
the Group’s operating environments.

Environment – Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) 
The  following  report  includes  nthe  climate-related  financial  disclosures  that  are  consistent  with  the  eleven   
TCFD recommendations Climate change is a core challenge for the Group, as we transition and work towards  
becoming  a  carbon  neutral  Group,  whereby  the  carbon  emitted  from  our  activities  are  balanced  by  absorbing   
carbon emissions.  As an engineering Group, that includes a heavy goods steel foundry and high temperature  
refractory  processing  business,  the  consumption  of  energy  is  an  integral  feature  in  the  manufacture  of  the   
complex products that are manufactured by the business.  Over the past few years the Group has been actively  
developing and implementing our carbon neutral plan and following a group wide assessment, we have set a  
target of becoming carbon neutral by 2035. 
The initiative consists of five mechanisms to achieve our carbon neutral target:

Description

Achievements to date

Future Plans 

Initiative
Mechanism

Reduce  
Consumption 

(Scope 1 & 2 
emissions) 

Renewables

Taking engineering steps 
to reduce our consumption 
of gas and electricity in our 
companies by investing in 
more efficient plant and / 
or changing our working 
practices.

Utilisation of self-generated 
power through the use of 
solar panels and wind  
turbines.

Hydrogen

Finding and investing in a  
hydrogen generation power 
plant solution that can  
replace the natural gas 
utilised in our more energy 
intensive processing  
activities.

Offsetting

Investing in land suitable for 
planting trees to offset the 
CO2 that is generated from 
activities that cannot be  
removed by the above three 
mechanisms.

3rd Party 
Emissions 

(Scope 3 
emissions) 

Take strategic steps to  
reduce Scope 3 emissions 
that are produced not by the 
Company itself but by those 
indirectly responsible within 
its value chain.

An 11% reduction in electricity has 
been achieved over the last two years.  
Modifications range from electric 
company cars, lighting, automatic 
switching off programming, base load 
monitoring and replacement of heavy 
duty fans, use of inverters and pumps 
that offer a greater power efficiency.

14 of the originally planned 22  
projects have been completed,  
providing the Group with 5.7MWp  
of solar power, and significantly  
contributing to reducing the Groups 
electricity purchased by 24.7%, over 
the last two years. 
This alone will save the Group in  
excess of £1 million per year by  
utilising self-generated solar at 4.5p 
versus electricity from the grid at 
18p per kwh. 

Following extensive research with 
the use of a wind and solar powered 
electrolysis machine, hydrogen was 
identified as a carbon free alternative 
for our continuous gas burning  
process.  A bespoke first of class  
solution was designed but following 
two unsuccessful grant applications 
the project is on hold due to it not 
being commercially viable without 
the support of government.

With the knowledge that the Group 
would not be able to naturally reduce 
its carbon footprint to zero, it has 
purchased a 1,180 acre site in Wales 
to plant 560,000 trees that will  
generate in the region of 120,000 
tonnes of CO2 offset credits over the 
next 55 years.  This will offset more 
than 100% of our steel foundry’s gas  
consumption, the largest gas  
consumer within the Mechanical  
Engineering Division of the Group.

The Group has developed a draft 
Scope 3 emissions policy and plan.

17

Ongoing monitoring, review of 
plant and modifications to our 
manufacturing processes to  
reduce our overall consumption 
of gas and electricity.

Over the short to medium term,  
a further 10MWp of solar power 
is planned and ready to be  
installed but is pending  
permissions from the Distribution 
Network Operator. 
Installation of two wind turbines 
at Hoben International has been 
investigated and we have  
commenced the planning  
process with the local council. 

Continue to seek alternatives to 
operating a 1580 degree Celsius 
process without the use of natural 
gas and / or obtain Government  
support for a green hydrogen 
plant.

Our specialist contractor,  
Scottish Woodlands, who have 
advised throughout the process 
will commence Stage 1 planting 
over the next eighteen months.

The Group endeavours to analyse 
and set specific Scope 3 medium 
term KPI’s to reduce them in the 
coming years.

 
  
GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (continued)

Environment – Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) (continued)

A  £13  million  additional  banking  facility,  specifically  for  the  funding  of  “Green  Projects”,  to  accelerate  the   
Group’s implementation of Green initiatives and projects, was put in place in January 2022.  As at 30th April, 2023,  
the  Group  had  utilised  £8.2  million  of  the  £13  million  facility  on  the  above  initiatives,  with  many  of  the   
initiatives having paybacks that are less than four years. 
The  reason  why  we  are  only  taking  a  fifty  five  year  view  on  the  offsetting  produced  by  the  woodland  project,   
despite  the  fact  that  it  will  generate  credits  for  one  hundred  years,  is  that  by  2073  all  electricity,  used  by  the   
Group, will be generated by Green methods and all hydro carbon needed for very high temperature processing  
applications is expected to have been converted to hydrogen, which will be generated using green electricity. 

Governance 
The Board has overall accountability for the management of all climate change related risks and opportunities,  
as  well  as  being  responsible  for  the  day  to  day  implementation,  monitoring  and  management  of  our  climate   
goals.    Climate-related  risk  is  considered  by  the  Board  as  a  standalone  agenda  item  and  accordingly  receives   
regular  updates  on  its  environmental  assessments,  commitments  and  performance  from  the  respective   
individuals  around  the  group  that  have  been  tasked  with  a  climate-related  job  to  carry  out.    The  updates  are   
obtained  as  and  when  matters  and  opportunities  arise,  at  which  point  they  are  then  relayed  on  to  the  rest  of   
the Board.  The Group’s Audit Committee supports the Board in ensuring climate-related issues are integrated  
into the Group’s activities and risk management processes, in addition to reviewing and recommending policy 
proposals to the Board.

Risk Management 
Climate  change  related  matters  are  monitored  by  the  Board  and  Audit  Committee  to  ensure  that  they  are   
embedded in our risk management and planning process, in addition to our long-term strategic decision-making.   
The  identification  and  management  of  climate  change  risks  follow  our  established  risk-management  process,   
of which the key elements are set out within the Strategic Report, on pages 13 to 14. 
Furthermore the Board is directly able to determine which risks and opportunities could have a material impact  
on the Group, as well as how to prioritise them, by having a flat management structure and taking a hands-on  
approach so that they are actively immersed within all aspects of the business and each subsidiary. 
It  is  the  opinion  of  the  Board  that,  with  the  Group's  activities  on  Green  projects,  climate  change  will  have  no   
significant effect on the Group's financials, including: 
1. Contract  profitability.    Whilst  there  will  be  fewer  contracts  for  the  oil  and  gas  markets,  we  have  already   
substituted  a  significant  proportion  of  these  contracts  with  new  naval  component  supply  and  nuclear   
decommissioning activity.  Whilst cost increases can be expected, the Company has the ability to pass these  
costs  on  to  the  customers  through  the  use  of  short  validity  periods  on  quotes  as  well  as  building  in   
escalation clauses within its longer term contracts.  The fact that it is Group policy to manufacture and sell  
products with high technology and high gross margins assists in insulating the Group from high energy costs. 
2. Going Concern of any Group company, as bank facilities will continue to be available and with the Group’s  

strong cash generation, it has the ability to reduce its debts at a faster rate, should it so wish. 

3. Cash flow, generating our own green electricity is a much lower cost than buying electricity from the grid and 
our  investments  are  self-financing  and  will  ultimately  save  the  Group  money  over  the  life  of  those  assets   
and projects. 

4. Carrying value and useful economic life of the Group's plant and equipment, investment and intangibles. 
Had  we  still  been  heavily  dependent  on  oil  and  gas  project  contracts  and  had  done  nothing  on  green  power   
investments the stated situation above would be different.

18

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (continued)

Environment – Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) (continued)

Metrics and Targets 
Given the nature of our business and the diversification of our products and markets, the Board has determined  
that the total of Scope 1 and Scope 2 emissions is the most appropriate metric to use to assess climate-related  
risks  and  opportunities  in  line  with  its  strategy  and  risk  management  process.    The  Group's  key  performance   
business  metric  is  tonnes  of  CO2  emitted  per  £  million  pounds  of  turnover  of  the  Group.    See  below  for  a   
graphical  disclosure  of  our  historic  emissions,  achieved  reduction  and  forecast  target  of  being  carbon  neutral   
by 2035.

Scope 1 and 2 Emissions Data

Carbon Neutral target, whilst possible, is heavily dependent on our gas usage and the government providing  
support to industry to bridge the cost gap that will enable companies to invest in alternatives such as green  
hydrogen.  Until this occurs, the Group will not be able to reach its carbon neutral target as incurring the full  
cost that would be involved would be unviable and not possible. 
We calculate our GHG emissions using the GHG Protocol Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard (revised 
edition).

19

GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (continued)

Strategy 
In  line  with  the  Task  Force  on  Climate-related  Financial  Disclosures  (TCFD)  reporting  requirements  and  in   
conjunction  with  our  detailed  assessment  that  has  been  carried  out  against  the  TCFD  guidance,  the  following   
table  sets  out  the  impact  of  the  short,  medium  and  long-term  risks  and  opportunities  that  the  Group  has   
identified in relation to climate change. 
As  reported  above,  within  the  TCFD  Risk  Management  section,  the  Boards  hand  on  approach  enables  it  to   
immediately  evaluate  as  and  when  climate-related  risks  and  opportunities  change  and  whether  its  strategy   
needs to be amended.

TCFD
Category

Description

Potential Impact

Scenario
**

Time
Frame*

Risk:  Direct requirement to pay carbon taxes per 
tonne emitted.

>3°C

Medium

Financial
Magnitude

Business 
Resilience / 
Readiness

Medium but 
reducing 
with carbon 
neutral 
activity

Ongoing 
Offsetting & 
Reduction 
steps

Risk: Increasing building, operation and transport 
standards leading to increased investment into 
equipment and higher supply chain and material 
costs.

2-3°C

Short

Medium

Manage

emissions

l Pricing of GHG 
a
g
e
L
&
y
c
i
l
o
P

Higher 
environmental 
standards

s
t
f
i
h
s
y
g
o
l
o
n
h
c
e
T

Electrification 
– growth in EV 
transport

Opportunity: Increased sales of AVD for use on 
lithium ion battery fires.

2-3°C

Short to 
Medium

Positively – 
High

Monitor

Contractual 
Projects

Opportunity: Progressive transfer to higher value 
added products.

2-3°C

Medium

Positively – 
Medium

Manage

Substitution of 
technology

Opportunity: Transition to high temperature gas 
powered manufacturing processes onto a green 
alternative.

2-3°C

Medium

Medium

Monitor

d Transition away 
n
a
from fossil fuels
m
e
D
d
n
E

Increased cost of 
raw materials

Risk: Reduced gross margin from sales of valves to 
the oil and gas industry.

>3°C

Medium

Medium

Manage – 
O&G exposure 
reduced from 
60% to 23%, 
over the last 
ten years.

Risk: Impact on the availability and pricing of key 
raw materials due to transitional and physical risks.

2-3°C

Medium

Low

Manage

Cost of Capital

Risk:  Access to the financial industry and credit 
becomes tied to high levels of sustainability 
performance. 

>3°C

Medium

High

Employee Risk

Risk: Attracting the highest level of talent should
become easier as potential employees see the Groups 
prospects to becoming carbon neutral by 2035.

>3°C

Long

Low

Natural / 
Extreme Climate 
Events

Risk: Damage to physical assets and loss of revenue.

Medium / 
Long

High

>3°C

l
a
n
o
i
t
a
t
u
p
e
R

l
a
c
i
s
y
h
P

Balance 
and Reduce 
Initiative

Balance 
and Reduce 
Initiative

Geographical 
diversification
Insurance
Business 
Continuity 
plans

Opportunity: Increased demand for submersible 
pumps for disaster relief.

Medium

Low

Monitor

20

 
 
 
 
GROUP STRATEGIC REPORT

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (continued)

Strategy (continued)

* Short < 3 years   Medium 3-5 years   Long > 5 years 
**Worst Case scenario (>3ºC) 
Our Worst Case Scenario sees a world where climate action is delayed by world governments failing to act on  
climate change.  This delay would result in a world where physical climate change risks are the greatest across  
our three scenarios. 
Paris Alignment Scenario (2-3ºC) 
This scenario sees a market-led transition to a lower carbon future through global government commitments to  
the Paris Agreement.  This would result in increased regulation of climate action and a reduction of the physical  
impacts  of  climate  change  compared  with  our  Worst  Case  scenario,  where  governments  fail  to  legislate  in   
accordance with the Paris Agreement. 
Transformation Scenario (<2ºC) 
This scenario sees a rapid decarbonisation pathway, where global emissions are close to zero in 2040, driven by  
society.  The speed of change required to limit global warming to 1.5 degrees is likely to create stability in our  
supply  chain  as  suppliers  try  to  keep  pace  with  decarbonisation  demands  and  shifting  preferences  towards   
localisation. 

FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS 

The  Group  Strategic  Report  contains  forward-looking  type  statements  and  information  based  on  current   
expectations,  and  assumptions  and  forecasts  made  by  the  Group.    These  expectations  and  assumptions  are   
subject  to  various  known  and  unknown  risks,  uncertainties  and  other  factors,  which  could  lead  to  substantial   
differences  between  the  actual  future  results,  financial  performance  and  the  estimates  and  historical  results   
given  in  this  report.    Many  of  these  factors  are  outside  the  Group’s  control.    The  Group  accepts  no  liability  to   
publicly  revise  or  update  these  forward-looking  statements  or  adjust  them  for  future  events  or  developments, 
whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except to the extent legally required. 

The Group Strategic Report was approved by the Board on 7th August, 2023 and is signed on its behalf by:  

T. J. W. Goodwin
Director

M. S. Goodwin
Director

S. R. Goodwin
Director

21

 
DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

REPORT OF THE DIRECTORS 

The  Director’s  have  pleasure  in  presenting  their  reports  and  audited  financial  statements  for  the  year  ended   
30th April, 2023. 
The  Directors’  have  presented  their  Group  Strategic  Report  on  pages  3  to  21.    The  Group  Strategic  Report  is   
intended  to  be  an  analysis  of  the  development  and  performance  of  Goodwin  PLC  and  contains  a  description   
of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group and an indication of likely future developments and the  
required statements under Statutory Instrument 2008/410 Schedule 7 of the Companies Act 2006.  The Chairman’s 
Statement is part of the Group Strategic Report of the Directors for the year and provides the financial review,  
including some of the key performance indicators and future trends of the business.  Also included in the Group 
Strategic Report for the year are the Group’s Objectives, Strategy and Business Model on page 8, Principal Risks 
and Uncertainties on pages 13 and 14, and the Corporate Social Responsibility Report on pages 15 to 21.   
The  Board  considers  that  the  Chairman’s  Statement,  the  Group  Strategic  Report,  the  Directors’  Reports  and   
the  Financial  Statements,  taken  as  a  whole,  are  fair,  balanced  and  understandable  and  that  they  provide  the   
information  considered  appropriate  for  shareholders  to  assess  the  Group’s  position  and  performance  during   
the financial year and at the year end, and to assess the business model and strategy. 

Proposed ordinary dividends 
The Directors’ recommend that an ordinary dividend of 115p per share (2022: 107.80p) be paid in equal instalments 
of  57.5p  per  share  on  6th  October,  2023  and  on  or  around  12th  April,  2024  to  shareholders  on  the  register  on   
15th September, 2023 and on or around 22nd March, 2024 respectively.  The ordinary dividend is subject to the  
approval of the shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 29th September, 2023. 
See comments on page 12 regarding the Dividend Policy. 

Directors  
The Directors of the Company who have served during the year are set out below. 

M. S. Goodwin   
S. R. Goodwin  
T. J. W. Goodwin 
J. Connolly (retired 31st March, 2023) 
B. R. E. Goodwin  
N. Brown
J. E. Kelly (Non-Executive Director) 
The Chairman and the Managing Directors do not retire by rotation. 
No Director has a service agreement with the Company, nor any direct beneficial interest in the share capital of  
any subsidiary undertaking.  The Chairman does not have any other significant external appointments. 

Shareholdings 
The Company has been notified that as at 3rd August, 2023, the following had an interest in 3% or more of the  
issued share capital of the Company: 
J. W. and R. S. Goodwin 2,178,133 shares (29%), J. W. and R. S. Goodwin 1,509,084 shares (20.10%). These shares 
are registered in the names of J. M. Securities Limited and J. M. Securities (No. 3) Limited respectively.  J. H. Ridley 
501,709 shares (6.68%), Rulegale Nominees Limited (JAMSCLT) 394,064 shares (5.25%). 
In  line  with  LR  9.2.2AD  R  (1),  relating  to  Controlling  Shareholders,  the  Company  confirms  that  a  written  and   
legally binding agreement is in place, and has complied with the independence provisions set out in LR 6.5.4 R.   
The Company confirms that, as far as it is aware, the controlling shareholders have complied with the agreement. 
The percentages above take into consideration the 180,000 reduction in shares, with the total number of shares  
in issue being 7,509,600 at the date of signing the financial statements. 

Share capital 
The Company’s issued share capital comprises a single class of share capital which is divided into ordinary shares 
of 10p each.  Information concerning the issued share capital in the Company is set out in note 27 to the financial 
statements on page 81. 

All of the Company’s shares are ranked equally and the rights and obligations attaching to the Company’s shares  
are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association, copies of which can be obtained from Companies House in 
England  and  Wales  or  by  writing  to  the  Company  Secretary.    The  Directors  of  the  Company  do  not  have  any   
on-going  powers  in  relation  to  the  purchase  of  its  own  shares  and  there  are  no  restrictions  on  the  voting   
rights of shares and there are no restrictions in their transfer other than: 
(cid:129) certain restrictions as may from time to time be imposed by laws and regulations (for example, insider trading 

laws); and 

(cid:129) pursuant to the Market Abuse Regulation whereby Directors of the Company require approval to deal in the  

Company’s shares. 

Additionally, the Company is not aware of any agreements between shareholders of the Company that may result 
in restrictions on the transfer of ordinary shares or voting rights, and further details on the recent tender offer  
can be found within note 31 on page 90. 

22

 
DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

REPORT OF THE DIRECTORS (continued)

Research and development 
The  Group  invests  significantly  in  research  and  development,  and  for  the  year  ending  30th  April,  2023  the   
majority  of  development  occurred  within  Dupré  Minerals.    In  addition  to  ongoing  development  of  the   
revolutionary fire extinguishing agent for lithium-ion battery fires, known as AVD, Dupré has also been working  
on a new high performance fire blanket, specifically designed for fires involving devices incorporating lithium-ion 
batteries.    Other  development  projects  in  the  Group  include  enhancing  our  submersible  slurry  pump  range  to   
include a hydraulically driven variant, as well as the ongoing advancement of casting methodologies to obtain  
improved mechanical properties at the same time as maintaining efficiency in terms of manufacturability. 

Change in control 
The Group’s committed loan facilities include a change of control clause, which states that a change of control of 
the parent Company will be classed as an event of default and would enable the providers at their discretion to  
withdraw the facilities.  

Stakeholders relations 
All shareholders are encouraged to participate in the Company’s Annual General Meeting.  With the exception of 
the General Meeting on 30th May, 2023, in respect of the tender offer, no shareholder meeting has been called  
to discuss any business other than ordinary business at the Annual General Meeting. 
The  Board  complies  with  the  recommendations  of  the  UK  Corporate  Governance  Code  that  the  notice  of  the   
Annual General Meeting and related papers should be sent to shareholders at least twenty working days before  
the meeting. 
The Directors attend the Annual General Meeting.  The Chairman and other members of the Board and the Chair of 
the Audit Committee and Audit Committee members will be available to answer questions at the forthcoming  
Annual General Meeting.  In addition, proxy votes will be counted and the results announced after any vote on a 
show of hands. 
The Chairman ensures that the views of shareholders are communicated to the Board as a whole, ensuring that  
Directors develop an understanding of the views of shareholders.  Any individual requests for information from  
shareholders  are  dealt  with  by  the  Chairman,  and  where  any  such  requests  are  subject  to  restraint  in  that   
where any disclosure would give rise to share price sensitive information, then the requests would be declined,  
or referred to the Board for release to all shareholders through the Stock Exchange. 
Engagement with the Group’s suppliers, customers and other stakeholders can be found within the Strategic Report 
on pages 15 to 17. 

Going concern 
The  Directors,  after  having  reviewed  the  projections  and  possible  challenges  that  may  lie  ahead,  believe  that   
there  is  a  reasonable  expectation  that  the  Group  has  adequate  resources  to  continue  in  operational  existence   
for at least twelve months from the date of approval of these financial statements, and have continued to adopt  
the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements. 
As at 30th April, 2023, the Group’s gearing ratio stood at 26.3% (2022: 25.8%) against a substantial shareholders’  
net worth of £125 million (2022: £115 million).  The retained reserves of the Group put it in a strong position to  
deal with unforeseen material adverse issues. 
The Group has continued to incur high energy costs throughout the financial year, but it has been able to manage 
the  increases  in  costs.    With  the  measures  already  put  in  place,  together  with  the  continued  monitoring  of   
the  energy  costs  incurred,  we  do  not  see  the  impact  of  energy  costs  giving  rise  to  a  going  concern  issue.   
Furthermore,  the  fact  that  it  is  Group  policy  to  manufacture  and  sell  products  with  high  technology  and  high   
gross margins assists in insulating the Group from high energy costs. 
Within our severe but plausible stress test model, it is demonstrable that the Group has sufficient funds, after the 
share buy-back transaction, to cover the Group’s and the Company’s financial commitments during the forecast  
period whilst remaining compliant with its financial covenants.  The stress test model starts with the forecasts  
generated by the subsidiary directors and reflects their specific knowledge of the market conditions, strategy and 
outlook.    Each  of  these  subsidiary  level  forecasts  is  then  reviewed,  challenged  and  approved  by  the  relevant   
Group Managing Director who themselves are immersed in each of the businesses.  The stress test model then  
predicts the impact of a severe but plausible reduction in the pre-tax profit forecast by reducing revenues by 18% 
without  adjusting  downwards  the  capital  expenditure  programme,  maintaining  the  overheads  at  their  current   
expected  levels  and  keeping  the  financing  facilities  at  the  same  amounts  that  were  in  place  at  year  end.     
The  results  of  the  stress  test  modelling  did  not  highlight  any  going  concern  issues,  breaches  of  covenants  or   
requirements for any further financing facilities. 
Whilst our carrying values of trade debtors and contract assets are significant, we see little risk here in terms of  
recovery.  Where possible, we credit insure the majority of our debtors and our pre credit risk (work in progress), 
and  for  significant  contracts  where  credit  insurance  is  not  available,  we  ensure,  where  possible,  that  these   
contracts are backed by letters of credit or cash positive milestone payments.   
As  discussed  elsewhere  within  these  accounts,  the  Mechanical  Engineering  order  book  remains  high  and  the   
Refractory Engineering segment continues to be buoyant.  
The  Directors  are  confident  that  the  Group  and  Company  will  have  sufficient  funds  to  continue  to  meet  their   
liabilities as they fall due for at least twelve months from the date of approval of the financial statements and  
therefore have prepared the financial statements on a going concern basis. 

23

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

REPORT OF THE DIRECTORS (continued)

Viability Statement 
In accordance with provision 31 of the UK Corporate Governance Code the Directors have assessed the Group’s  
viability over a three year period to 30th April, 2026.  
While  the  Board  has  no  reason  to  believe  that  the  Group  will  not  be  viable  over  a  longer  period,  the  Board   
believes that a three year review period is prudent, and provides the readers of the report with a sensible degree  
of confidence. 
As part of the going concern review process we have considered the impact of plausible adverse events over an  
extended period (two more years, taking the total review period to 30th April, 2026), where it predicted a severe  
but  plausible  reduction  in  the  pre-tax  profit  forecasts  for  each  year.    The  plausible  adverse  event  scenarios   
(using the same logic as outlined for the stress test model within the going concern review section) have been  
modelled by reducing revenues by 18% each year from the base case forecast without adjusting downwards the 
capital  expenditure  programme,  maintaining  the  overheads  at  their  current  expected  levels  and  keeping  the   
financing facilities at the same amounts that were in place at year end.  The results demonstrated that the Group 
did  not  breach  any  of  its  covenants  and  has  sufficient  financing  facilities  in  place  to  deal  with  these  adverse   
events and given that a large proportion of the future capital expenditure is by definition discretionary, and that 
overheads  could  be  reviewed  and  changed  accordingly,  there  is  further  confidence  that  a  downturn  will  not   
impact on the Group’s ability to deal with material adverse events.  
The  workload  within  the  Mechanical  Engineering  segment  remains  high  and  so  underpinning  performance  in   
the short to medium term.  The Directors are therefore able to confirm that they have a reasonable expectation  
that the Group will be able to continue in its operations and remain financially viable over this extended period  
to 30th April 2026. 

Corporate governance statement 
The Company’s Corporate Governance Statement is set out on pages 25 to 27 and forms part of the Directors’  
Report. 

Financial Risk Management 
The  Group  has  in  place  risk  management  policies  that  seek  to  limit  the  adverse  effects  on  the  financial   
performance  of  the  Group  by  using  various  instruments  and  techniques,  further  details  can  be  found  within   
note 28 on page 81. 

Auditor 
In accordance with Section 489 of the Companies Act 2006 and the recommendation of the Board of Directors,  
a resolution is to be proposed at the Annual General Meeting for the re-appointment of RSM UK Audit LLP as  
auditor of the Company. 

Approved by the Board of Directors and signed on its behalf by: 

T. J. W. Goodwin 

Chairman

         7th August, 2023 

24

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT 

Introduction 
The Board comprises five Executive Directors and an independent Non-Executive Director; the Audit Committee  
comprises the Non-Executive Director, who is the Audit Committee Chair, and three other members, the previous 
Chairman,  the  previous  Managing  Director  and  the  previous  Company  Secretary,  all  of  whom  had  held  their   
previous  positions  for  twenty  seven  years  and  so  have  very  substantial  knowledge  and  experience  of  the   
diversified  Group’s  people,  product  ranges  and  the  very  diversified  overseas  markets  in  which  the  Group   
operates.  The Board and the Audit Committee fulfil the roles required for effective corporate governance and the 
Board considers that it has the right governance to execute its strategy to achieve its objectives.  
The  Board  has  always  felt  that  it  should  be  recognised  that  what  may  be  appropriate  for  the  larger  company   
may  not  necessarily  be  so  for  the  smaller  company,  a  point  raised  previously  in  the  Cadbury  Code  of  Best   
Practice.  Whilst conscious of its non-compliance with certain aspects of the Code as detailed below, we do not  
believe  that  at  this  stage  in  the  Group’s  development  and  circumstances  it  is  appropriate  to  change  its  own   
operational or governance structure with the sole objective of achieving compliance with the revised Code given 
that the Board’s current corporate governance strategy has been accepted by a large majority of its shareholders.  
The Group's governance structure, as set out below, is a structured system of rules and practices that shapes  
how  the  Company  operates,  whilst  also  remaining  dynamic,  in  addition  to  providing  the  Board  and  Directors   
the necessary oversight to review its progress against its strategic plan.  
For  the  past  eight  years  the  Company  has  had  one  Non-Executive  Director  who  is  also  the  Chair  of  the  Audit   
Committee, which has three other members as described above.  This is not in full compliance with the Code,  
but  for  a  smaller  company,  due  to  the  limits  of  time,  availability  and  cost,  the  Board  considers  this  as  an   
optimum  compromise  that  is  beneficial  to  shareholders  and  the  Group’s  long-term  interests.    For  specific   
independent expertise the Board engages independent consultants. 
Compliance statement under the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 
The Company is required to report on compliance throughout the year.  In relation to all of the provisions except 
those mentioned below, the Company complied throughout the year.   
As noted in the introduction above, the Group does not comply with aspects of the Code’s requirements under  
provisions 11 and 13 and provision 12 in terms of having a senior independent Director. Since 14th April, 2015 a 
Non-Executive Director with the role of Chair of the Audit Committee has been appointed.  The Group does not  
have a Remuneration Committee or a Nominations Committee as required under provisions 10, 17, 23, 24, 32,  
33,  36  and  41.    Contrary  to  provision  36,  the  company  does  not  have  a  formal  policy  for  post-employment   
shareholding requirements as it does not have any unvested or un-exercised vested share options in existence. 
The roles of the Chairman in running the Board and the Managing Directors in running the Group’s businesses are 
well understood.  It is not considered necessary to have written job descriptions.  This is contrary to provision 14.  
In the best interests of the Company it has been concluded that an independent Chairman is not necessary when 
considered with the Company’s investor profile, thereby the company does not comply with Provision 9 of the Code.   
The Chairman and Managing Directors do not retire by rotation, which is contrary to provision 18 of the Code and 
as required by Provision 7, the Board has a conflicts of interest policy which includes a procedure for disclosure  
and review of any potential conflicts and, if appropriate, approval by the Board.  The shareholding of the executive 
directors is not considered a conflict in interests due to their contribution to the long-term sustainable success  
of the Group being aligned with its other shareholders. 
The Code is available to view on the website of the Financial Reporting Council at www.frc.org.uk 
The Board 
During the year, the Board met formally nine times, and details of attendees at these meetings are set out below: 

M. S. Goodwin … … … …       …
S. R. Goodwin … … … …       …
T. J. W. Goodwin … … … …       …
J. Connolly (retired 31st March, 2023)        …
B. R. E. Goodwin … … … …       …
N. Brown … … … … …       …
J. E. Kelly … … … … …       …

9 out of 9 attended 
9 out of 9 attended 
9 out of 9 attended 
7 out of 9 attended 
9 out of 9 attended 
9 out of 9 attended 
8 out of 9 attended 

The Chairman and Managing Directors do not retire by rotation.  With this exception, all Directors retire at the first 
Annual General Meeting after their initial appointment and then by rotation at least every three years, which is  
contrary to provision 18 of the Code.  
The Board retains full responsibility for the direction and control of the Group and continually monitors and assesses 
the culture to ensure that it is aligned with the Group's purpose, values and strategy.  With the culture of the Group 
being well established there have not been any specific actions taken in the year other than continuing to lead by 
example and encouraging open communication, transparency and respect.  Whilst there is no formal schedule of 
matters reserved for the Board, all acquisitions and disposals of assets, investments and material capital-related 
projects are, as a matter of course, specifically reserved for Board decision, but referred to the Audit Committee for 
comment. 
The Board meets regularly to discuss corporate strategy; to formulate and monitor the progress of business plans 
for all subsidiaries and to identify, evaluate and manage the business risks faced.  The management philosophy of 
the Group is to operate its subsidiaries on an autonomous basis, subject to overall supervision and evaluation by 

25

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued)

The Board) (continued)

the Board, with formally defined areas of responsibility and delegation of authority.  The Group has formal lines  
of reporting in place with subsidiary management meeting with the Board on a regular basis.  Regular informal  
meetings  are  also  held  to  enable  all  members  of  the  Board  to  discuss  relevant  issues  with  local  management   
and staff at the business units.  This is in addition to the flat structure in place and the hands-on approach of the  
Directors,  which  is  how  the  Board  continually  assesses  emerging  risks.    Following  the  identification  of  an   
emerging  risk  the  Board  dynamically  sets  out  a  plan  and  typically  appoints  an  individual  with  the  necessary   
skill set, whether they be internal or external, to either manage or mitigate the risk. 
The Audit Committee 
The Audit Committee is made up of the following: J.E. Kelly (Chair), J.W. Goodwin, R.S. Goodwin and P. Ashley  
and  the  Audit  Committee  reports  to  the  Board.    The  Audit  Committee  has  met  formally  eight  times  since  the   
issue  of  the  Annual  Report  for  the  year  ended  30th  April,  2022,  with  all  members  attending  each  meeting.     
The  responsibility  of  the  Audit  Committee  is  explained  in  the  Audit  Committee  Report  on  pages  28  to  31.   
The Audit Committee takes into account the Company’s corporate Mission Statement, Objectives and Strategy,  
and  reviews  investor  correspondence  and  comments,  regulatory  changes,  current  issues  and  market  trends.   
The Audit Committee uses expert opinion where considered appropriate. 
Board evaluation 
The Managing Directors, Chairman and Audit Committee address the development, composition, diversity and  
training needs of the Board as a whole.  An evaluation of the effectiveness and performance of the Board and the 
Directors  of  subsidiaries  has  been  carried  out  by  the  Managing  Directors,  Chairman  and  Audit  Committee,   
by  way  of  personal  discussions  and  individual  performance  evaluation.    As  the  Managing  Directors  and  the   
Chairman  are  executive  Directors,  which  in  addition  to  there  not  being  defined  performance  obligations  that   
individuals are assessed against, the Group does not comply with provision 13 of the UK Corporate Governance 
Code.    Furthermore,  as  the  Chair  does  not  individually  assess  and  or  act  on  the  results  of  the  evaluation,  the   
Group does not comply with provision 22.  The Board recognises the importance of its composition and diversity 
and  remains  committed  to  suitable  corporate  governance  and  believes  that  a  wide  range  of  knowledge,  skills   
and experience are among the essential drivers to long-term success.  We continue to evaluate the composition  
of  the  Board  and  recognise  the  value  that  non-executives  typically  offer,  by  ensuring  that  the  Board  is  acting   
in the best interests of the Company. The Board considers the value offered in this circumstance is significantly  
less  as  the  Executive  Directors,  who  form  part  of  the  controlling  concert  party,  are,  in  essence,  custodians  of   
the business, resulting in their interests being the long-term growth and success of the business.  Furthermore,  
the Board would lose its dynamic management of the business that over the history of the Group has enabled  
it  to  vastly  outperform  the  FTSE  100  and  FTSE  250,  see  page  33  for  details.    Additionally,  when  consideration   
is  also  given  to  the  recommended  tenure  of  non-executives,  the  benefit  of  any  new  non-executives  is  limited   
by  the  fact  that  it  would  take  a  significant  amount  of  time  to  understand  the  vastly  diverse  and  extremely   
technical products that the Group supplies.  
The structure of the Board and its Audit Committee brings balance, astute guidance and deep understanding of  
the business at both operational and Board level.  
All Directors have reasonable access to the Company Secretary and to independent professional advice at the  
Company’s expense. 
External audit  
The  external  auditor  is  appointed  annually  at  the  Annual  General  Meeting.    The  Board,  following  review  and   
recommendations received from the Audit Committee, considers the appointment of the auditor, and assesses on 
an annual basis the qualification, expertise, cost and objectivity of the external auditor.  The auditor's independence 
is  safeguarded  by  the  Group  following  its  policy  and  procedure  on  non-audit  services.    The  policy  recognises   
that certain material or highly sensitive non-audit services may not be carried out by the external auditor, such  
as  valuations  or  advisory  services.    In  addition  to  the  auditor  having  their  own  policies  and  checks,  the  Audit   
Committee  monitors  the  level  of  non-audit  services  provided  to  the  Group  by  the  external  auditor  to  ensure   
that their independence is not compromised. 
The  effectiveness  of  the  external  audit  is  assessed  annually,  following  completion  of  the  audit.    Following   
discussions with all parties involved in the audit on an operational level, the Board discusses on the efficiency  
and  performance  of  the  overall  audit.    This  is  then  discussed  with  the  Audit  Committee  which  evaluates  the   
effectiveness  of  the  audit  process.    Any  suggested  improvements  in  audit  processes  from  the  prior  year  are   
reported  back  to  the  Board  and  the  auditor  partner  so  that  they  can  be  taken  into  account  when  planning  the   
audit for following year.  
Disclosure of information to auditor  
The Directors who held office at the date of approval of this Corporate Governance Report confirm that, so far as 
they  are  each  aware,  there  is  no  relevant  audit  information  of  which  the  Company’s  auditor  is  unaware;  and   
each Director has taken all the steps that he or she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself or herself 
aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditor is aware of that information. 
Internal control and risk management 
The  Board  has  overall  responsibility  for  the  Group’s  systems  of  internal  controls  and  risk  management  which   
are  designed  to  manage  rather  than  eliminate  risk  and  provide  reasonable  reassurance  against  material   
misstatement or loss.     

26

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE REPORT (continued)

The Board has primary responsibility for controlling: operational risks; financial risks including funding and capital 
spend; compliance risks; and political risks.  The Audit Committee has been delegated responsibility for reviewing 
corporate reporting, financial risk management and to regularly review the effectiveness of the Group’s internal  
controls together with consideration of any reports from the external auditor.  The Audit Committee Report is  
on  pages  28  to  31.  Except  as  noted  within  this  Corporate  Governance  Report,  the  Board  confirms  that  the   
internal control systems comply with the UK Corporate Governance Code. 
The Group’s main systems of internal controls include regular visits and discussions between Board Directors  
and  subsidiary  management,  in-house  General  Counsel,  health  and  safety  committee  and  the  Group  Internal   
Auditor,  on  all  aspects  of  the  business  including  financial  reporting,  risk  reporting  and  compliance  reporting.     
In  addition,  there  is  Board  representation  with  Goodwin  PLC  Directors  on  the  boards  of  the  subsidiaries.   
Any concerns are reported to the members of the Audit Committee and to the Board.  The Group maintains a risk 
register,  has  business  continuity  programmes  and  has  insurance  programmes  that  are  all  regularly  reviewed.     
These procedures have been in place throughout the year and are ongoing to endeavour to ensure accordance  
with  the  FRC  publication  ‘Risk  Management,  Internal  Control  and  Related  Financial  and  Business  Reporting’.     
The Board considers that the close involvement of Board Directors in all areas of the day to day operations of  
the  Group’s  business,  including  considering  reports  from  management  and  discussions  with  senior  personnel 
throughout  the  Group,  represents  the  most  effective  control  over  its  financial  and  business  risks  system,   
by providing an ongoing process for identifying, evaluating and managing the principal risks faced by the Group.  
In  particular,  authority  is  limited  to  Board  Directors  in  key  risk  areas  such  as  treasury  management,  capital   
expenditure and other investment decisions. 
The close involvement of Board Directors in the day to day operations of the business ensures that the Board  
has  the  financial  and  non-financial  controls  under  constant  review  and  so  it  is  not  currently  considered  that   
formal  Board  reviews  of  these  controls  would  provide  any  additional  benefit  in  terms  of  the  effectiveness  of   
the Group’s internal control systems.  This is contrary to provision 29 of the UK Corporate Governance Code. 
The Board recognises the importance of an effective internal audit function to assist with the management and  
review  of  internal  controls  and  business  risk.    The  Group's  internal  auditor  continues  to  make  good  progress   
reviewing  internal  controls,  procedures  and  accounting  systems,  though  it  is  planned  that  the  activity  of  the   
Group internal auditor is expanded, going forward, by the addition of an experienced assistant. During Covid-19, 
many more Group directors, management accountants and employees became much more proficient in using  
Zoom.   This has, to some extent, improved the level of coverage but it is a fact of life that the best results of  
internal audit are achieved by site visits.  The Board of Directors and Senior Management will continue to have  
close  involvement  on  a  day  to  day  operational  basis  and  the  scope  and  results  of  internal  audit  work  to  be   
performed will be kept under review in the coming year. 
The  Board  considers  that  certain  functions  are  best  carried  out  by  independent  external  bodies  with  specific   
expertise, who then report to the Board directly or through the Audit Committee.   
The Board confirms that it has not been advised of any material failures or weaknesses in the Group’s internal  
control systems. 
Approved by the Board of Directors and signed on its behalf by: 

T. J. W. Goodwin 
Chairman

       7th August, 2023 

27

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT 

The key role of the Audit Committee is to provide confidence in the integrity of the Group’s financial risk management, 
internal financial controls and corporate reporting. The Audit Committee, as empowered by the Group’s Board of 
Directors, has responsibility for: 

a) Reviewing and checking the Group’s full year and half year Accounts and the Annual Report, as presented to  

the Audit Committee. 

b) Reviewing  the  Group’s  financial  and  non-financial  internal  controls  and  risk  management  systems  and   

commenting on whether they are relevant and effective.  

c) Making  recommendations  to  the  Group’s  Board  of  Directors  on  the  appointment  and  remuneration  of  the   
Group’s external auditor; ensuring independence and objectivity of the auditor; the effectiveness of the audit  
process;  and  that  the  Group  receives  value  for  money  from  the  audit  and  that  no  non-audit  services  are   
carried out by the auditor. 

d) Reviewing comments and feedback brought to its attention by Directors or other employees of the Group. 
e) Reviewing and commenting to the Board on any significant investment plans of the Group. 
f) Reviewing the Group’s “whistle-blowing” procedures and reviewing any significant reports. 
g) Reviewing the scope of work for the internal audit function and the resultant reports. 
h) Reviewing  significant  accounting  estimates  and  judgements  relating  to  the  financial  statements  with  the   
external auditor and members of the Board, and providing advice on whether the Annual Report and accounts 
as a whole are fair, balanced and understandable. 

i) Reviewing and recommending climate-related policies. 

The Audit Committee discharges each of its above responsibilities as follows: 

1. Examining the integrity of the Group’s Annual Report and half year Interim Report: 

The Chair of the Audit Committee is an independent Non-Executive Director. The other members of the committee 
either  are  persons  with  experience  in  the  Group’s  typical  products  and  or  markets  or  have  vast  historical   
knowledge  of  the  business  and  activities  of  the  Group.    This,  together  with  their  regular  involvement  in   
reviewing  the  Group’s  financial  performance  and  accounts,  provides  sufficient  recent  financial  experience.   
Regular  meetings  are  held  between  members  of  the  Audit  Committee,  Directors  of  Goodwin  PLC  and  its   
subsidiaries,  General  Managers  and  Senior  Management  of  the  UK  subsidiaries.    Members  of  the  Audit   
Committee are involved in regular discussions with the Directors, General Managers and Senior Management  
of  each  subsidiary  where  the  positions  taken  on  subjective  financial  matters  are  discussed.  Each  overseas   
subsidiary is normally visited at least once during the year by a member of the Audit Committee, and / or by a 
Main  Board  Director,  for  meetings  with  the  General  Managers  and  Senior  Management  with  reports  sent   
back to the Audit Committee.  Flight and self-quarantining restrictions still applied to some of our overseas  
subsidiaries during the year and use of Zoom has enabled regular meetings with them to continue.  Where  
possible, travel to and from some of those areas has recommenced. Any areas where the Audit Committee  
feels that the positions taken within any particular subsidiary are either inappropriate or merit further review  
are discussed with the Board of Directors of Goodwin PLC.  
For the half year Interim Report, the Audit Committee reviews the financial and non-financial content, including 
the  Chairman’s  Statement,  and  reviews  the  financial  statements  and  qualitative  notes  of  the  financial   
statements, to help ensure that they are balanced, relevant, appropriately compliant with relevant accounting 
standards/legislation,  and  are  consistent  and  complete.    The  Audit  Committee  discusses  with  the  Board  of   
Directors  their  views  as  to  whether  the  half  year  Interim  Report,  taken  as  a  whole,  is  fair,  balanced  and   
understandable  and  provides  the  information  necessary  for  shareholders  to  assess  the  Group’s  half  year   
performance.  The  figures  in  the  half  year  Interim  Report  are  not  audited,  but  the  external  auditor  is  given   
sight of these before publication. 
For the full year Annual Report, the Audit Committee reviews the financial and non-financial content of the  
Group Strategic Report, including the Chairman’s Statement; the Corporate Governance Report; the Directors’ 
Report; the Directors’ Remuneration Policy and Report; and reviews the financial statements and the qualitative 
notes to the financial statements to examine whether the content is fair, balanced, relevant, understandable,  
appropriately  compliant  with  relevant  accounting  standards  /  legislation  and  consistent  and  complete.   
The Audit Committee has discussed the full year Annual Report and their views with the Group external auditor.  
The  Audit  Committee  confirmed  to  the  Board  that  in  its  opinion  the  proposed  Annual  Report  for  the  year   
ended  30th  April,  2023  appropriately  represents  the  Group’s  trading  position  and,  taken  as  a  whole,  is  fair,   
balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group’s  
full year performance, its position at the year end, and its objectives, strategy and business model.  

2. Helping  to  ensure  the  Group  carries  effective  and  relevant  financial  and  non-financial  internal   

controls and financial risk management systems: 

To  assess  the  effectiveness  of  systems  for  internal  financial  controls,  financial  reporting  and  financial  risk   
management, the Audit Committee reviews reports from Main Board Directors on the Group’s subsidiaries;  
reviews  reports  from  the  Group  Chief  Accountant;  reviews  reports  from  General  Managers  of  the  Group’s   
subsidiaries;  reviews  quarterly  financial  reports;  reviews  reports  from  internal  and  external  audit;  requests   
and reviews reports from independent external consultants; and reviews the Group’s risk register, business  
continuity programmes and levels of insurance. 

28

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued)

2023 Audit Committee Risk Programme 
The terms of reference for the Audit Committee and how it discharges its duties have been presented to the  
Board and ratified. 
Risk Management: 
As a method of adding formality to the management of risk within all Group companies, Steven Birks, a former 
Goodwin  PLC  Director,  set  up  a  framework  to  mentor  each  subsidiary  in  enhancing  their  risk  analysis  and   
controls.  This framework continues to be followed by Directors and general managers, and, when appropriate, 
the Audit Committee reviews the status.   
Having  focused  initially  on  overseas  companies,  all  subsidiaries  in  the  Group  are  now  included  in  the  risk   
analysis and areas being scrutinised in detail, other than risks individual to each company, are: 
a)  having appropriate limits of contract liability. 
b)  having appropriate levels and types of insurance. 
c)  ensuring appropriate control of cash flow and banking arrangements. 
d)  ensuring health and safety continues to be given priority and that there is a progressive plan for improvement 
e)  ensuring product development and life cycles are managed relative to the global market. 
f)   ensuring that the provision of trained and skilled manpower is appropriately matched to the requirements of 
    each company. 
g)  risk analysis and preventative measures associated with the installation and commissioning of new plant,  
    modified plant and new processes. 
h)  review of progress on environmental (TCFD) and social matters. 
As reported last year, our internal Group General Counsel set up and carried out a training programme for all  
Directors and senior managers of the UK subsidiary companies to increase contract risk awareness, both for  
sales and purchases.  A start has now been made on rolling this training out to overseas subsidiaries. 
In addition, training has been given to both UK and overseas subsidiary Directors and senior managers on  
sanctions and export controls. 
Training has also been provided to UK and overseas subsidiary Directors on Scope 1, Scope 2 and Scope 3  
carbon emissions. 
The Audit Committee continues to review the effectiveness of Know Your Customer (KYC), credit insurance,  
political  risk  insurance  and  contract  terms  and  conditions.    Gallagher  as  brokers  for  the  Group’s  insurance   
cover continue to review policies in place, along with Board members, and report back to the Audit Committee.  
Market risk 
No customer accounts for more than 10% of the annual Group turnover.  The country and sector dependency  
for the year is shown by the charts on page 10.  
Technical risk 
The performance of new products issued to market always has a degree of risk until a multi-year track record  
has  been  attained.    This  statement  relates  to  all  Group  companies  in  both  the  Mechanical  and  Refractory   
Engineering Divisions. 
Product failure / contract risk 
This has been reviewed and is unchanged from that previously stated. 
Financial risk 
This has been reviewed and is as stated in previous years with the perceived increased volatility in exchange 
rates and the possibility of high foreign exchange hedging costs for forward long-term contracts. 
The Board, with the support of the Audit Committee, has reviewed the accounting treatment of the ten year  
interest rate hedge that was taken out last year to protect the Group against the interest rate increases that  
have occured to date, in addition to the anticipated increases expected over the coming years. 
The Audit Committee has in conjunction with the Board reviewed the Group’s guaranteed banking facilities  
in terms of quantum and tenure. 
Regulatory compliance 
The Audit Committee continues to monitor regulatory compliance, training and competency.  The Committee 
continues  to  review  the  impact  on  the  Group  of  the  Climate  Change  Act  2008  (2050  Target  Amendment)   
Order 2019.  
Human Resources 
The  age  profile  of  senior  managers  and  perceived  skill  gaps  within  each  Group  company  continue  to  be   
reviewed by the Audit Committee.  Focus has been to ensure that the Group has sufficient accounting capacity 
and also on the recruitment of quality and project managers in the light of the on-going business changes. 

29

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued)

2. Helping  to  ensure  the  Group  carries  effective  and  relevant  financial  and  non-financial  internal   

controls and financial risk management systems: (continued)

Information Technology 
During the year the Audit Committee continued to monitor the risks posed affecting information security and the 
steps taken to minimise these.  A comprehensive internal audit of the Group’s IT systems was completed during 
the year.  Some risks have been identified and a plan to address those risks is being devised and implemented. 
Capital expenditure 

The  Audit  Committee  also  reviews  and  comments  to  the  Board  on  major  capital  purchases  or  company   
acquisitions being proposed by the Board of a unit or linked value greater than £2 million.   Gross proposed  
or  actual  capital  expenditure  of  all  Group  companies  is  also  reviewed  to  help  ensure  the  Board  maintains   
awareness of how such expenditure will affect the limits agreed to be in place at the time. 

The Audit Committee has confirmed its view to the Board that in its opinion, the Group carries relevant internal 
controls and risk management systems appropriate to minimise the perceived risks of the Group’s business. 

3. The Group’s external auditor 

Following the last audit tender process RSM UK Audit LLP (“RSM”) was appointed as the Group’s Auditor at the 
Company’s AGM in October 2020.  Following shareholder approval at the Annual General Meeting in October 
2022, RSM was re-appointed as the Group’s Auditor for the year ended 30th April, 2023. In line with regulation, 
the  audit  will  be  put  out  to  tender  at  least  every  ten  years.  Subject  to  not  bringing  the  tender  forward,  the   
Group will be required to re-tender the audit in financial year 2029.  

In  addition  to  the  auditor  having  their  own  policies  and  checks,  to  preserve  objectivity  and  independence,   
the Audit Committee has a policy that restricts the external auditor from carrying out any non-audit services  
during the year.  Throughout the year the Audit Committee monitors the level of non-audit services provided  
by RSM to the Group and confirms that RSM did not provide any non-audit services to the Group during the  
year.  The Company has, for many years now, used a different accountancy practice to that of the statutory  
auditor  for  its  UK  tax  services.    To  further  assess  both  objectivity  and  independence,  the  Audit  Committee   
also  takes  into  consideration  any  relationships  between  the  Group  and  the  audit  firm,  the  audit  fee  as  a   
proportion  of  the  overall  fee  income  of  the  audit  firm  and  whether  the  Group  has  employed  any  former   
members of the external audit team. 

The Audit Committee has met formally with the Group’s external auditor, RSM, to discuss the full year Annual 
Report, and has met with and discussed matters with them as part of the audit process during the current financial 
year being reported on. No material concerns were raised during these meetings or discussions.  

The Audit Committee appraises the auditor’s effectiveness on an annual basis, through regular engagement with 
RSM during the audit process, in addition to taking into account: 

(cid:129)  feedback from directors, senior managers and the Group Chief Accountant 
(cid:129)  the quality and scope of all key external auditor plans and reports  
(cid:129)  the delivery and performance against this plan 
(cid:129)  the behaviour, qualifications and performance of their audit team 
(cid:129)  RSM’s understanding of the Group’s business and industry sector 

The Audit Committee was satisfied with the external auditor’s independence of the audit process. 

4. Reviewing comments and feedback 

There is regular contact with Directors and employees where open and frank discussion is encouraged. 

5. Whistle-blowing Procedures 

The Group has a whistle-blowing policy in place whereby employees can report any suspected misconduct  
or concerns, either anonymously on a dedicated telephone line, or to the Chairman, the Company Secretary  
or  the  Chair  of  the  Audit  Committee.  Such  calls  are  investigated  and  are  reported  to  the  Audit  Committee.     
The Audit Committee has confirmed to the Board that the Group’s whistle-blowing policy and procedures are 
appropriate.  

6. Internal Audit 

The scope of internal audit has been set by the Audit Committee and the results reviewed. 

The  internal  audit  function  operates  a  random  rotation  policy  which  prioritises  based  on  materiality  and   
endeavours to cover all Group subsidiaries at least once within a three year cycle either via the Group Internal 
Auditor or by the respective Group Managing Directors or members of the Audit Committee.  Where possible 
travel to overseas subsidiaries has now commenced through remote desk-top internal audits of our overseas  
subsidiaries  have  continued,  where  the  Covid-19  restrictions  still  applied  during  the  year  just  completed.   
However,  the  larger  profit  earning  overseas  subsidiaries,  Noreva,  Gold  Star  Powders  India  and  Goodwin   
Pumps India have been subject to full statutory audit by RSM Germany and India respectively. 

30

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

7. Accounting estimates and judgements relating to the Financial Statements 

AUDIT COMMITTEE REPORT (continued)

The Audit Committee again reviewed what it considered to be the accounting estimates and judgement areas  
within the Group Annual Report for the year ended 30th April, 2023. 

Consideration of the key and other estimates and judgements as disclosed in note 2 of the financial statements, 
as well as: 

(cid:129)  Review of Group inter-company late payments; 
(cid:129)  Review of the Group’s gearing, control of capital investment and the financing of further green investment;  
(cid:129)  Review of overseas subsidiary company risk mitigation; 
(cid:129)  Review and management of the age profile across the Group; 
(cid:129)  Assessment of the banks’ credit ratings;   
(cid:129)  Review of Duvelco’s market potential and future profitability.   

The  Audit  Committee  also  took  account  of  the  findings  of  RSM  in  relation  to  their  external  audit  work  for 
the year. 

J. E. Kelly
Chair of the Audit Committee

                      7th August, 2023 

31

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY AND REPORT 

This report includes the Group’s Remuneration Policy for Directors and sets out the Annual Directors’ Remuneration 
Report. 

Group’s Remuneration Policy for Directors 
The Group’s policy in respect of Directors’ remuneration is to provide individual packages which are determined 
having due regard to the Group’s current and projected profitability, the employee’s specific areas of responsibility 
and performance, their related knowledge and experience in the Group’s specific fields of operation, the external 
labour market and their personal circumstances whereby a package to remunerate and motivate the individual so 
as to best serve the Group is set.  The policy is designed to be simple and naturally aligned with the performance of 
the Group and its overall strategic objective of growing the long-term profitability of the Group in a sustainable  
manner whilst delivering a fair return to its shareholders.  Consideration is given to the financial and non financial 
performance  of  the  individual  and  how  they  have  performed  on  delivering  against  each  of  the  Group’s   
strategy points, and the Group’s culture, purpose and values. 
Individual salaries are also indirectly linked up and down to the time allocated and perceived effort by the Director 
to the Group’s business.  Many Directors, as indeed employees, put in hours of work way beyond what could be  
requested and such personal devotion to duty by a Director is rewarded without formulae.  All Board members  
have access to independent advice when considered appropriate.  In forming its policy, consideration has been  
given to the UK Corporate Governance Code best practice provisions on remuneration policy, service contracts  
and compensation and has considered the remuneration levels of Directors of comparative companies.  
The  remuneration  policy  for  other  employees  is  broadly  based  on  principles  consistent  with  the  policy  for   
Directors.  Salary reviews take into account Group performance as well as subsidiary performance, local pay and 
market conditions. 
Whilst being aware of the requirements to show in graph form the breakdown of base pay, bonus pay, pension  
and  long-term  benefits,  the  Group  is  unable  to  comply  with  this  requirement  as  Directors  are  not  paid  in   
accordance  with  any  specific  performance  criteria  or  KPIs.    Directors  are  paid  based  on  their  level  of  activity   
within  the  Group,  their  knowledge  and  experience  of  the  Group’s  activities  or  similar,  the  performance  of  the   
Group  versus  market  opportunity  whilst  also  considering  the  Director’s  personal  circumstances  and  the   
salary  needed  to  ensure  continuity  of  employment.    This  in  itself  may  result  in  decreases  or  increases  in  a   
Director's salary within any year as illustrated in the matrix below.

Element of
Pay

Purpose and
Link to Strategy

Operation

Maximum

Performance
Targets

Changes for 
2022 / 2023

Salary

Pensions

Other benefits

Reflects the Directors’ 
level of activity and 
achievement within 
the Group, their 
knowledge and  
experience of the 
Company’s activities 
or similar, the  
performance of the 
Group versus market 
opportunity, whilst 
also considering the 
salary needed to  
ensure continuity of 
employment. 

All Executive Directors 
are entitled to have 3% 
added to their gross  
remuneration which, 
by nature of salary 
sacrifice, is put into a 
pension scheme 
where they have direct 
dealings with the  
selected investment 
fund provider.

Fully expensed car or 
cash alternative, 
health insurance or 
other services.

Reviewed  
annually at the 
anniversary of the 
previous salary  
adjustment for 
the individual  
Director.

Generally in line 
with inflation and 
the wage / salary  
increase awarded  
to employees, but 
this is not rigid.

The Group’s  
performance, 
good or bad, may 
result in the salary 
being changed.

Directors set the 
base increase in 
salaries. For the  
period May 2022  
to April 2023 the  
increase was  
generally 8.5%.

Monthly  
payments

Currently 3%  
of gross  
remuneration

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

No changes.  
This policy  
was adopted  
in October 2013 
for the Directors 
and entire UK  
workforce. 

See details of the  
Directors’  
emoluments on 
page 36.

We believe the above meets the requirement of Schedule 8, Companies Act 2006, regarding the changes in 2022 / 
2023. The Policy and Report is signed by the Chairman and the Managing Directors.

32

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY AND REPORT (continued) 

Group’s Remuneration Policy for Directors (continued) 

In any company there are specific individual circumstances that on occasions will merit special treatment in a given 
year for a Director either to keep or look after the person, indeed no different than we may do for an employee.  
In  the  matrix  of  remuneration  for  Directors  you  will  note  the  Company  has  given  itself  flexibility  to  deal  with   
specific circumstances which may not even be able to be made public for confidentiality reasons of which there  
are many.  However, bearing in mind the performance of the Company over the past twenty years and more and 
that the Directors’ salaries are anything but excessive versus the norm of other PLCs, this is the Board’s policy.  

Total shareholder return – unaudited 

For reference the TSR of Goodwin PLC versus the FTSE 100 and the FTSE 350 is shown below for not only the last 
five but also the last ten years and the last twenty years. 

TSR for last 5 Years … … …
TSR for last 10 Years … … …
TSR for last 20 Years … … …

Goodwin
155%
131%
5,376%

FTSE 100
27%
79%
320%

FTSE 350 
24% 
80% 
354%  

As is required by the Listing Rules, we show in graph form both the salary of the Managing Director (CEO equivalent) 
of Goodwin PLC and the TSR over the past ten years.  We, however, do not list out the salary of the Financial  
Director of Goodwin PLC versus the TSR as in Goodwin PLC we have a Group Chief Accountant who carries out 
75%  of  the  duties  of  a  Financial  Director,  but  we  do  not  have  what  would  generally  be  known  as  a  Financial   
Director.  This is for the reason that certain decisions that outsiders might consider are the sole responsibility of  
the Financial Director are not. In Goodwin PLC it is a team effort and such decisions are made not only by the  
Group Chief Accountant but also by the Managing Directors and the Chairman. 

For  confidentiality  and  flexibility  reasons,  the  Board  policy  is  not  to  disclose  exit  /  termination  payments  to   
Directors but the policy is to remain within the law, to fairly compensate good leavers and minimise payments  
to  bad  leavers.    In  the  last  ten  years,  the  Company  has  managed  to  avoid  paying  any  termination  payments   
to  bad  leavers.    It  is,  however,  Board  policy  to  limit  termination  payments  to  a  maximum  of  100%  of  gross   
annual  salary  and  should  such  amount  be  exceeded  then  it  will  be  reported  in  the  Annual  Report  giving  the   
reason why. 

The Company takes seriously its responsibility for ensuring a fair deal between employees, shareholders, customers 
and the local community and maintaining an appropriate balance.  

The  Company  does  not  use  or  pay  any  external  advisers  or  consultants  for  remuneration  or  incentive  policy.   
Shareholder engagement is by nature of the Annual Report, the Annual General Meeting and the votes therein. 

Approval of the Company’s Directors’ Remuneration Policy 

The  Company  put  the  Remuneration  Policy  to  the  vote  at  the  Annual  General  Meeting  on  5th  October,  2022,   
when it was passed by 99.94% of those who voted.  The Company will be putting the Remuneration Policy to  
the vote again in 2026, which is three years from the last vote, as is required by the Listing Rules.  

33

 
 
DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

DIRECTORS REMUNERATION POLICY AND REPORT (continued)

Annual Directors’ Remuneration Report 

This report is submitted in accordance with the Directors’ Remuneration Report Regulations. 

Consideration by the Directors of matters relating to Directors’ remuneration 

The  Company’s  Remuneration  Policy  for  Directors,  including  remuneration  of  its  non-executive,  is  set  by  the   
Board as a whole and is described in pages 32 to 33 therein.  The Policy has been followed in the financial year  
to 30th April, 2023 and will be followed in the next financial year. 

The Board of Directors are also the key management personnel as defined in IAS 24. 

Service contracts 

None of the Directors has a service contract. A Director may resign at any time by notice in writing to the Board.  
There  are  no  set  minimum  notice  periods  but  all  Directors  other  than  the  Chairman  and  Managing  Directors   
are  subject  to  retirement  by  rotation  and  as  employees  also  have  notice  periods  in  accordance  with  law.   
No compensation as of right is payable to Directors on leaving office. 

Relative importance of spend on pay 

The table below shows shareholder distributions and total employee expenditure, and the percentage change in both: 

2023
£’000
8,636
Ordinary dividends proposed in respect of the year (£’000) … … … …
Total employee costs (£’000) … … … … … … … … … 50,075
1,144
Average employee numbers … … … … … … … … …

2022 
£’000
8,289
44,745
1,112

%
 4.2 
11.9 
2.9 

Approval of the Company’s Annual Directors’ Remuneration Report 

An ordinary resolution for the approval of the Annual Directors’ Remuneration Report will be put to shareholders  
at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.  The Annual Directors’ Remuneration Report presented in the accounts 
to  30th  April,  2022  was  put  to  the  shareholders  at  last  year’s  Annual  General  Meeting  on  5th  October,  2022.   
The Annual Directors’ Remuneration Report was accepted with 99.94% of proxy votes cast in favour. 

Total shareholder return – unaudited 

The  following  graphs  compare  the  Group’s  total  shareholder  return  over  the  ten  and  twenty  years  ended   
30th April, 2023 with various FTSE indices.  The graphs also show the change in the earnings of the previous  
Managing Director for the periods up to 30th April, 2019. 

The base earnings figure since 30th April, 2019 is the amount earned by each Managing Director. 

2019
£’000

2020
£’000

2021
£’000

2022
£’000

2023 
£’000

397

310

355

374

406 

Total payroll costs, excluding the Managing Director’s salaries, have decreased by 12.0%.   During the year, the initial 
base increase awarded to employees in the UK companies was 5.3% followed by a further 3.2% being awarded  
later on in the year.  The following graphs have not been audited.

34

 
 
 
DIRECTORS REMUNERATION POLICY AND REPORT (continued)

Annual Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

The increase in the Goodwin PLC share price since 2003 plus dividends re-invested would mean that £1.00 invested 
in 2003 by 30th April, 2023 would be worth £54.76.  The increase in the share price since 2013 plus dividends  
re-invested would mean that £1.00 invested in 2013 would at 30th April, 2023 be worth £2.31.

35

DIRECTORS REMUNERATION POLICY AND REPORT (continued)

Annual Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued) 

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

The auditor is required to report on the following information contained in this section of the Annual Directors’  
Remuneration Report. 
Directors’ interests in the share capital of the Company as well as ex Directors – audited 
The interests of the Directors in the share capital of the Company at the beginning and end of the financial year 
were as follows:  

Number of 10p ordinary shares 
30th April
2023

30th April 
2022  

Beneficial

M. S. Goodwin … … … … …
S. R. Goodwin … … … … …
T. J . W. Goodwin… … … … …
J. Connolly (retired 31st March, 2023) …
B. R. E. Goodwin … … … … …
N. Brown …
… … … … …
J. W. Goodwin* … … … … …
R. S. Goodwin* … … … … …
…
J. W. Goodwin* and R. S. Goodwin*
…
J. W. Goodwin* and R. S. Goodwin*

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…

69,054
78,786
118,926
28,802
54,536
445
52,041
21,670
2,154,009
1,492,036

69,265 
78,978 
122,334 
28,802 
59,189 
445 
71,866 
33,236 
2,129,153 
1,457,358 

Non-beneficial

J. W. Goodwin* and E. M. Goodwin

…

…

14,166

14,166                              

* Audit committee member / ex Director. 

Details of individual emoluments and compensation – audited 

Single Total Figure Table                                    

Salary

Year ended                                                         

M. S. Goodwin    …      …      …      …      …       …       …
S. R. Goodwin     …      …      …      …      …       …       …
T. J. W. Goodwin …      …      …      …      …       …       …
J. Connolly…       …      …      …      …      …       …       …
B. R. E. Goodwin …      …      …      …      …       …       …
N. Brown    …      …      …      …      …      …       …       …
J. E. Kelly    …      …      …      …      …      …       …       …

2023
£’000
399
399
280
238
256
184
-

Benefits

Non-Exec
in kind Director’s
fees
2023
£‘000
-
-
-
-
-
-
78

2023
£’000
5
5
5
1
5
11
-

Pension
contrib- 
utions
2023
£’000
2
2
8
7
8
6
-

Total 

2023 
£’000 
406 
406 
293 
246 
269 
201 
78 

Total           …      …      …      …      …      …      …       … 1,756

32

78

33

1,899

Salary

Benefits
in kind

Single Total Figure Table 

Year ended

M. S. Goodwin … … … … … … …
S. R. Goodwin … … … … … … …
T. J. W. Goodwin … … … … … … …
J. Connolly … … … … … … … …
B. R. E. Goodwin … … … … … … …
N. Brown … … … … … … … …
J. E. Kelly  … … … … … … … …

2022
£’000
360
360
259
270
233
167
-

Total

… … … … … … … …

1,649

Non-Exec
Director’s
fees
2022
£’000
-
-
-
-
-
-
72

Pension
contrib-
utions 
2022
£’000
11
11
8
8
7
5
-

Total 
total 

2022 
£’000 
374 
374 
270 
280 
243 
183 
72 

72

50

1,796

2022
£’000
3
3
3
2
3
11
-

25

Benefits in kind consist of the provision of a fully expensed car, a cash alternative scheme, healthcare insurance  
or  other  services.    The  employer’s  national  insurance  costs  relating  to  the  Directors’  remuneration  amounted   
to £250,000 (2022: £222,000).

36

 
 
                                                                           
                                                                           
 
                                                                              
DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

DIRECTORS REMUNERATION POLICY AND REPORT (continued)

Annual Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)
Pay Comparison – audited 
In  accordance  with  the  remuneration  regulations,  we  are  including  in  the  report  a  table  comparing  the  annual   
change of each Director’s pay with that of the average employee’s pay.  This is required over a rolling five year  
period, but as the requirements came into effect for financial years ending 2021, the table below will only show  
the comparison from 30th April, 2020. 

Annual Percentage Change of Average Remuneration
of each Director
M. S. Goodwin … … … … … … … …
S. R. Goodwin … … … … … … … …
T. J. W. Goodwin … … … … … … … …
J. Connolly (retired 31st March, 2023) … … … …
B. R. E. Goodwin … … … … … … … …
N. Brown (appointed 11th December, 2020) … … …
J. E. Kelly  … … … … … … … … …
… … …
UK Base Increase Awarded to Employees 

2022 / 2023
%
8.5**
8.5**
8.5
0
10.4
10
8.5
8.5

2021 / 2022
%
5
5
5
0
10
N/A
6

2020 / 2021 
% 
15* 
15* 
32* 
16 
42 
N/A 
9 

Any increases greater than the UK average employee % change are a reflection of the further development of  
individual  Directors  in  the  areas  of  their  new  responsibilities.    It  should  be  noted  in  2023,  M.  S.  Goodwin  and   
S. R. Goodwin total remuneration has increased inline with the UK base increase but the reallocation of pension  
contribution  has  resulted  in  the  average  %  increase  of  their  salary  and  benefits  in  kind  increasing  by  11.2%   
compared to last year. 
* The above increases are in relation to the appointment of M. S. Goodwin, S. R. Goodwin and T. J. W. Goodwin  
as Mechanical Divisional Managing Director, Refractory Divisional Managing Director and Group Chairman  
respectively. 
** It should be noted in 2023, that the percentage for M. S. Goodwin and S. R. Goodwin is higher due to the  
changes in their pension contributions which affect these figures. 

Average % Increase of the UK Workforce 

As  required  to  be  disclosed  by  the  remuneration  regulations,  the  average  ‘mean’  pay  of  the  UK  workforce  has   
increased by 9.6%, which takes into account salary, bonuses and benefits in kind and is based on all individuals  
employed by Goodwin PLC and its UK subsidiaries.  The increase is a factor of the pay increases awarded in the  
year, as well as the business needing to employ individuals with a greater and wider skillset as the Group takes  
on more technical work.  

2022 / 2023
%
9.6

2021 / 2022
%
5

2020 / 2021 
% 
3

UK workforce average % Increase … …  … … …

Pay Ratio of Managing Directors 

In accordance with the Pay Ratio Regulations we are disclosing the comparison of our Managing Directors’ pay with 
that of our average UK employees.  It is appropriate that the Managing Directors’ pay was used in the comparison  
as we do not have what is generally known as a Chief Executive Officer.  

For the year ended 30th April, 2023 the pay for both the Managing Directors in the Single Total Pay Figure table is  
the same.  If the figures are different in any subsequent year, the higher of the two figures will be used in the ratio 
pay comparison section.  

The  tables  below  show  our  Managing  Directors’  pay  ratio  at  the  25th,  median  and  75th  percentile  of  our  UK   
employees as at 30th April, 2023: 

Financial
Year

Method

25th
percentile
pay ratio

Median
pay ratio

75th 
percentile 
pay ratio

2023 FTSE 350

-

44:1

2023 ratios

2022 ratios

2021 ratios

2020 ratios

Option A

Option A

Option A

Option A

14:1

14:1

14:1

12:1

37

11:1

11:1

11:1

10:1

-

8:1

8:1

8:1

7:1

DIRECTORS REMUNERATION POLICY AND REPORT (continued)

Annual Directors’ Remuneration Report (continued)
Pay Ratio of Managing Directors (continued)

DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

Financial
Year

2023 Total Pay

2022 Total Pay

2021 Total Pay

2020 Total Pay

Managing
Directors
£’000

25th
percentile
pay
£’000

Median
pay
£’000

75th 
percentile 
pay 
£’000

406

374

355

333

29

27

26

26

38

34

33

33

52

48

45

45

Notes:  
1. Total pay has been calculated for each employee and, where applicable, prorated to calculate full-time  
     equivalent pay.   It includes payments that are taxable plus any employer pension contributions. 
2.  We offer competitive and fair rates of pay for all our UK employees taking into account personal circumstances. 
3.  We have opted for Option A of the pay ratio regulations as this is the preferred option under the regulations  

and also provides the most accurate data. 

4.  The above figures are based on the total pay as at 30th April, 2023. 

Equity Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) – Vested Share Options – audited 
All share options under the Equity Long-Term Incentive plan (LTIP) for the Executive Directors, that was approved  
at the Annual General Meeting on 5th October, 2016, have now been exercised and the Company has no follow-on 
LTIP  incentive  plans  in  place  or  proposed.    The  Company  does  not  have  a  formal  policy  for  post-employment   
shareholding  requirements,  and  contrary  to  provision  37  of  the  UK  Corporate  Governance  Code,  the  Company   
does  not  have  the  ability  to  recover  and  /  or  withhold  sums  or  share  awards  in  relation  to  the  vested  share   
options.  The shares vested as part of the above scheme further align the executive directors with the long-term  
interests of the shareholders, as do their not insignificant shareholdings already held. 

Total pension entitlements – unaudited 
In  line  with  the  Government’s  requirements  the  Group  administers  a  pension  scheme  for  all  UK  employees   
including Directors.  Under this Auto Enrolment Pension arrangement each Director is entitled to have an amount  
of  3%  of  gross  remuneration  paid  into  a  pension  scheme  where  they  have  direct  dealings  with  the  selected   
investment  fund  provider.    The  employee  also  contributes  a  minimum  of  4%  of  remuneration  to  their  fund.   
The pension contributions are to defined contribution pension schemes which are independent of the Company.  
The Company has no obligations to make any payments in relation to pensions when a Director leaves service  
by nature of removal from office, resignation or retirement. 
The  Annual  Directors’  Remuneration  Report  was  approved  by  the  Board  on  7th  August,  2023  and  is  signed  on   
its behalf by: 

T. J. W. Goodwin
Director

M. S. Goodwin
Director

        S. R. Goodwin
        Director

38

 
DIRECTORS’ REPORTS

STATEMENT OF DIRECTORS’ RESPONSIBILITIES IN RESPECT OF THE 
ANNUAL REPORT AND THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 

The Directors are responsible for preparing the Strategic Report and the Report of the Directors, the Directors’  
Remuneration Report, the separate Corporate Governance Statement and the financial statements in accordance  
with applicable law and regulations.   

Company law requires the Directors to prepare Group and Company financial statements for each financial year.  
The Directors have elected under company law and are required under the Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct 
Authority  to  prepare  Group  financial  statements  in  accordance  with  UK-adopted  International  Accounting   
Standards.    The  Directors  have  elected  under  company  law  to  prepare  the  Company  financial  statements  in   
accordance  with  United  Kingdom  Generally  Accepted  Accounting  Practice  (United  Kingdom  Accounting   
Standards and applicable law). 

The  Group  financial  statements  are  required  by  law  and  UK-adopted  International  Accounting  Standards  to   
present fairly the financial position and performance of the Group; the Companies Act 2006 provides in relation  
to such financial statements that references in the relevant part of that Act to financial statements giving a true  
and fair view are references to their achieving a fair presentation. 

Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they  
give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and the Company and of the profit or loss for that  
period.  In preparing each of the Group and Company financial statements, the Directors are required to:  

a. select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;   

b. make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent;   

c. for the Group financial statements, state whether they have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted  

International Accounting Standards; 

d. for  the  Company  financial  statements,  state  whether  they  have  been  properly  prepared  in  accordance  with   

United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and 

e. prepare  the  financial  statements  on  the  going  concern  basis  unless  it  is  inappropriate  to  presume  that  the   

Group and the  Company will continue in business. 

The Directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain  
the  Group  and  the  Company’s  transactions  and  disclose  with  reasonable  accuracy  at  any  time  the  financial   
position  of  the  Group  and  the  Company  and  enable  them  to  ensure  that  the  financial  statements  and  the   
Directors’  Remuneration  Report  comply  with  the  Companies  Act  2006.    They  are  responsible  for  safeguarding   
the assets of the Group and the Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection  
of fraud and other irregularities.   

Directors’ statement pursuant to the Disclosure and Transparency Rules 

Each of the Directors, whose names are listed on page 22, confirm that to the best of each person’s knowledge: 

a. the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true  
and  fair  view  of  the  assets,  liabilities,  financial  position  and  profit  of  the  Company  and  the  undertakings   
included in the consolidation taken as a whole; and 

b. the Strategic Report contained in the Annual Report includes a fair review of the development and performance 
of the business and the position of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as  
a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face. 

The  Directors  are  responsible  for  the  maintenance  and  integrity  of  the  corporate  and  financial  information   
included on the Goodwin PLC website.   

Legislation  in  the  United  Kingdom  governing  the  preparation  and  dissemination  of  financial  statements  may   
differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

T. J. W. Goodwin
Director

M. S. Goodwin
Director

        S. R. Goodwin
        Director 

7th August, 2023

39

 
INDEPENDENT AUDITOR’S REPORT 
to the members of Goodwin PLC

Opinion 
We  have  audited  the  financial  statements  of  Goodwin  PLC  (the  ‘parent  Company’)  and  its  subsidiaries  (the 
‘Group’)  for  the  year  ended  30  April  2023  which  comprise  the  Consolidated  Statement  of  Profit  or  Loss, 
Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity, Consolidated 
Balance Sheet, Consolidated Statement of Cash Flows, Company Balance Sheet, Company Statement of Changes 
in Equity and notes to the financial statements, including significant accounting policies. The financial reporting 
framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group financial statements is applicable law and UK-
adopted International Accounting Standards. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the 
preparation  of  the  parent  Company  financial  statements  is  applicable  law  and  United  Kingdom  Accounting 
Standards  including  Financial  Reporting  Standard  101  "Reduced  Disclosure  Framework",  (United  Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice). 

In our opinion:  

• 

• 

• 

• 

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent Company’s 
affairs as at 30 April 2023 and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended; 
the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with UK-adopted International 
Accounting Standards; 

the parent Company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and 

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 
2006. 

Basis for opinion 
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable 
law. Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the Auditor’s responsibilities for the 
audit of the financial statements section of our report. We are independent of the Group and parent Company 
in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, 
including the FRC’s Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities and we have fulfilled our other 
ethical  responsibilities  in  accordance  with  these  requirements.  We  believe  that  the  audit  evidence  we  have 
obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion. 
Summary of our audit approach 

Key audit matters 

Materiality 

Scope 

Group 
Revenue recognition – revenue recognised over time 
Intangible assets – capitalisation and impairment 
Parent Company 
No key audit matters noted 

Group 
Overall materiality: £778,000 (2022: £715,000) 
Performance materiality: £583,000 (2022: £536,000) 
Parent Company 
Overall materiality: £430,000 (2022: £425,000) 
Performance materiality: £322,500 (2022: £318,000) 
Our audit procedures covered 80% of revenue, 92% of total assets and 74% 
of absolute profit before tax. 

Key audit matters 
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit 
of the Group and parent Company financial statements of the current period and include the most significant 
assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) we identified, including those which had 
the greatest effect on the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit and directing the efforts 
of the engagement team.  These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the Group and parent 

40

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Company financial statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate 
opinion on these matters. 
Revenue recognition – Revenue recognised over time 

Key audit matter description 

How the matter was addressed 
in the audit 

Key observations 

Refer  to  accounting  policies  in  note  1,  accounting  estimates  and 
judgements in note 2 and note 4.  
Revenue underpins the key measures of performance of the Group. 
As  a  profit-oriented  business,  we  considered  the  risk  of  fraud  in  the 
recognition of revenue. We identified that there was a heightened risk of 
misstatement around the year end through inappropriate application of 
the Group’s revenue recognition policies and revenue transactions being 
recognised in the wrong period. 
The  Group  has  contracts  with  customers  under  which  revenue  is 
recognised over time. Revenue recognised in the year on these contracts 
amounted to £79,998,000. 
Estimates are made by management based on work completed for each 
contract and costs to complete. 
Revenue  is  recognised  with  an  associated  adjustment  made  to  cost  of 
sales to adjust the level of profits recognised on the contract to be in line 
with the percentage stage of completion. 
Associated contract assets, liabilities and work in progress are recognised 
where applicable on these contracts. 
There is a risk that revenue could be misstated through: 
- inappropriate application of the Group’s revenue recognition policies; 
- the high level of estimation uncertainty in recognising revenue on over 
time contracts; or 
-  modifications  in  contractual  arrangements,  such  as  variations  and 
settlements of claims. 
We  assessed  whether  revenue  was  recognised  in  line  with  the  Group’s 
revenue  recognition  policies  and  IFRS  15  ‘Revenue  from  contracts  with 
customers’.  
We undertook tests of details on contracts that have been completed in 
the year and those open at the year end. 
We considered management's estimates of the stage of completion for 
open  contracts  at  the  period  end,  substantively  testing  supporting 
schedules,  including  verification  of  contractual  terms.    We  challenged 
management  on  the  key  assumptions  and  variances  identified  and 
reviewed historical budgeting accuracy. 
For  all  contracts  selected  we  tested  the  associated  contract  assets  and 
contract liabilities. 
The  Group  reached  a  settlement  for  additional  revenue  on  a  contract 
during the year. We checked the associated adjustments to revenue were 
appropriate for the period through our contract testing procedures. 
We reviewed the disclosures associated with revenue recognition.  
In  concluding  our  audit,  we  identified  misstatements  in  excess  of  the 
trivial  threshold  relating  to  revenue  contracts.  Where  misstatements 
were identified, we reported these to those charged with governance and 
certain adjustments were recorded by the management. The remaining 
unadjusted  misstatements  relating  to  revenue  contracts  were  below 
overall materiality. 
The  combination  of  revenue  contract  adjustments  with  other 
accumulated  unadjusted  misstatements  resulting  from  the  group  audit 
was  a  large  proportion  of,  albeit  below,  our  overall  materiality.  These 
adjustments, if corrected would serve to increase reported profit for the 
period. 

41

 
Intangible assets – capitalisation and impairment 

Key audit matter description 

How the matter was addressed 
in the audit 

Key observations 

Refer  to  accounting  policies  in  note  1,  accounting  estimates  and 
judgements in note 2 and note 15. 
The Group has various intangible assets including goodwill, brand names, 
intellectual property, manufacturing rights and development costs.  These 
assets form part of the Group’s cash generating units (CGUs). 
The  performance  of  each  CGU  varies  and  the  actual  or  expected 
performance  of  each  could  impact  the  carrying  value  of  the  Intangible 
assets within the CGU. 
The Group has incurred expenditure on development of new products in 
the year. As certain projects have moved towards production, there has 
also  been  capital  expenditure  on  plant  and  equipment.  Amounts  are 
capitalised if criteria are met in accordance with IAS 38 'Intangible assets' 
and IAS 16 ‘Property, plant and equipment’ 
The  viability  of  and  market  for  new  products  is  not  guaranteed. 
Judgement  is  required  in  considering  this  and  appropriate  disclosures 
should be made in the financial statements. 
We assessed the appropriateness of capitalisation of development costs 
and  capital  expenditure  in  a  new  CGU  due  to  the  impact  on  reported 
earnings. We challenged the judgements made in assessing whether the 
IAS 38 criteria for capitalisation had been met. 

We obtained management’s impairment model for their CGUs, including 
Goodwill and undertook audit procedures including: 

•  Assessing whether management's calculations comply with the 

requirements of IAS 36 ‘Impairment of assets’; 

•  Analysing  the  structure  and  integrity  of  the  model  and  the 

mathematical accuracy; 

• 

• 

• 

Challenging the main forecasting assumptions used in the value-
in-use  calculations  which  included  expected  revenues,  margin 
and the discount rate; 

Performing  sensitivity  analysis 
impairment; 

in  assessing  the  risks  of 

Corroborating assumptions through discussions with operational 
management; and 

•  Review of the disclosures in the financial statements.  

We  considered  the  amortisation  accounting  policy  for  each  category  of 
intangible asset. 

Based  on  our  procedures,  we  concluded  that  the  carrying  value  and 
disclosures in the financial statements were appropriate. 

Our application of materiality 
When establishing our overall audit strategy, we set certain thresholds which help us to determine the nature, 
timing  and  extent  of  our  audit  procedures.    When  evaluating  whether  the  effects  of  misstatements,  both 
individually and on the financial statements as a whole, could reasonably influence the economic decisions of 
the  users  we  take  into  account  the  qualitative  nature  and  the  size  of  the  misstatements.    Based  on  our 
professional judgement, we determined materiality as follows: 

Overall materiality 

Basis for determining overall 
materiality 

Group 
£778,000 (2022: £715,000) 

Parent Company 
£430,000 (2022: £425,000) 

4.5% of two year average adjusted 
profit before tax. 
Profit before tax has been adjusted 
for material non-recurring items. 

0.3% of Total Assets 

42

 
 
Rationale for benchmark applied 

Performance materiality 

Basis for determining 
performance materiality 

Reporting of misstatements to 
the Audit Committee 

Profit before tax is considered the 
key benchmark of the Group.  We 
have  normalised  this  over  a  two 
year period to reflect the fact that 
some 
revenue  contracts  span 
multiple periods. 
£583,000 (2022: £536,000) 

Total  assets  is  considered  the  key 
benchmark of the parent Company 
its 
as 
investments  as  a  non-revenue 
generating entity. 

the  entity 

relies  on 

£322,500 (2022: £318,000) 

75% of overall materiality 

75% of overall materiality 

in 

excess 

Misstatements 
of 
£38,900 and misstatements below 
that  threshold  that,  in  our  view, 
warranted reporting on qualitative 
grounds.  

in 

excess 

Misstatements 
of 
£21,500 and misstatements below 
that  threshold  that,  in  our  view, 
warranted reporting on qualitative 
grounds.  

An overview of the scope of our audit 
The Group consists of 35 components, located in the following countries:  

United Kingdom 
Germany 
India 
South Africa 
Thailand 

China 
South Korea 
Brazil 
Australia 
Finland 

The coverage achieved by our audit procedures was: 

Full scope audit 
Specific 
procedures * 
Total 

audit 

Number of 
components 
10 
1 

11 

Revenue 

Total assets 

78% 
2% 

80% 

92% 
- 

92% 

Absolute Profit 
before tax 

74% 
- 

74% 

*While the specific scope % represents the component's total portion; our procedures consisted of specific audit 
procedures over the cut-off of revenue of the component only. 

Procedures were performed at Group level and testing of intercompany eliminations were performed for the 
remaining 24 components.  

Of the above, full scope audits for three components and specific audit procedures for  one component were 
undertaken by component auditors. 

Conclusions relating to going concern  
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the  Directors’ use of the going concern basis of 
accounting  in  the  preparation  of  the  financial  statements  is  appropriate.    Our  evaluation  of  the  Directors’ 
assessment  of  the  Group’s  and  parent  Company’s  ability  to  continue  to  adopt  the  going  concern  basis  of 
accounting included: 

•  Review of management’s approved Board paper which set out the going concern basis, key forecasting 

assumptions, sensitivities and conclusion; 

•  Obtaining  copies  of  management's  forecasts  and  sensitivity  analysis  for  the  Group  and  checking  the 

mathematical accuracy of the forecasts; 

•  Understanding and reviewing the results of the annual budget review process, including submissions from 

the UK and overseas businesses which are approved by the Board; 

•  Comparing the forecasts to historical trading results and the key assumptions for expected growth, margin 

improvement and capital expenditure plans; 

•  Undertaking our own stress test to consider circumstances under which headroom would be eroded; 

43

 
 
 
 
 
 
•  Verifying the committed funding available to the Group and parent Company for the forecast period and 

the headroom this provided to the Group and parent Company. 

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or 
conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group’s or the parent Company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial statements 
are authorised for issue. 

In  relation  to  the  entity  reporting  on  how  they  have  applied  the  UK  Corporate  Governance  Code,  we  have 
nothing material to add or draw attention to in relation to the Directors’ statement in the financial statements 
about whether the Directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting. 

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect to going concern are described in the 
relevant sections of this report. 

Other information 
The  other  information  comprises  the  information  included  in  the  annual  report  other  than  the  financial 
statements and our auditor’s report thereon.  The Directors are responsible for the other information contained 
within the annual report.  Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, 
except  to  the  extent  otherwise  explicitly  stated  in  our  report,  we  do  not  express  any  form  of  assurance 
conclusion thereon.  

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information is 
materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit or 
otherwise appears to be materially misstated.  If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material 
misstatements, we are required to determine whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the financial 
statements  themselves.    If,  based  on  the  work  we  have  performed,  we  conclude  that  there  is  a  material 
misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact.  

We have nothing to report in this regard. 

Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 
In  our  opinion,  the  part  of  the  Directors’  remuneration  report  to  be  audited  has  been  properly  prepared  in 
accordance with the Companies Act 2006. 

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit: 

• 

• 

the information given in the Strategic Report and the Directors’ Report for the financial year for which the 
financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and 

the  Strategic  Report  and  the  Directors’  Report  have  been  prepared  in  accordance  with  applicable  legal 
requirements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception 
In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the parent Company and their environment 
obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified material misstatements in the Strategic Report or the 
Directors’ Report. 
We have nothing to report in respect of the  following matters in relation to which the Companies  Act 2006 
requires us to report to you if, in our opinion: 

• 

• 

adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent Company, or returns adequate for our audit 
have not been received from branches not visited by us; or 

the parent Company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited 
are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns; or 

certain disclosures of Directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 
• 
•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.  
Corporate governance statement  
We have reviewed the Directors’ statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability and that part of 
the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the parent Company’s compliance with the provisions of the 
UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review by the Listing Rules.  

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of 
the Corporate Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge 
obtained during the audit: 

44

•  Directors’ statement with regards the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of 

accounting and any material uncertainties identified set out on pages 23 to 24; 

•  Directors’ explanation as to their assessment of the Group’s prospects, the period this assessment 

covers and why the period is appropriate set out on page 24; 

•  Director’s statement on whether it has a reasonable expectation that the Group will be able to 

continue in operation and meets its liabilities set out on page 24; 

•  Directors’ statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 22; 
•  Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks 

set out on page 13; 

• 

• 

Section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and 
internal control systems set out on page 27; and, 

Section describing the work of the Audit Committee set out on page 29. 

Responsibilities of Directors 
As  explained  more  fully  in  the  Directors’  responsibilities  statement  set  out  on  page  39,  the  Directors  are 
responsible for the preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view, and for such internal control as the Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial 
statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error. 
In preparing the financial statements, the  Directors are responsible for assessing the  Group’s and the parent 
Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and 
using the going  concern basis of accounting unless the  Directors  either intend to liquidate the  Group or the 
parent Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so. 
Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements 
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free 
from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our 
opinion.  Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in 
accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists.  Misstatements can arise 
from fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be 
expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements. 

The extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud 
Irregularities  are  instances  of  non-compliance  with  laws  and  regulations.    The  objectives  of  our  audit  are  to 
obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding compliance with laws and regulations that have a direct 
effect on the determination of material amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, to perform audit 
procedures  to  help  identify  instances  of  non-compliance  with  other  laws  and  regulations  that  may  have  a 
material  effect  on  the  financial  statements,  and  to  respond  appropriately  to  identified  or  suspected  non-
compliance with laws and regulations identified during the audit. 

In relation to fraud, the objectives of our audit are to identify and assess the risk of material misstatement of 
the financial statements due to fraud, to obtain sufficient appropriate audit evidence regarding the assessed 
risks of material misstatement due to fraud through designing and implementing appropriate responses and to 
respond appropriately to fraud or suspected fraud identified during the audit.   

However, it is the primary responsibility of management, with the oversight of those charged with governance, 
to ensure that the entity's operations are conducted in accordance with the provisions of laws and regulations 
and for the prevention and detection of fraud. 

In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud, the Group 
audit engagement team and component auditors:  

• 

• 

obtained  an  understanding  of  the  nature  of  the  industry  and  sector,  including  the  legal  and  regulatory 
frameworks that the Group and parent Company operates in and how the Group and parent Company are 
complying with the legal and regulatory frameworks; 

inquired  of  management,  and  those  charged  with  governance,  about  their  own  identification  and 
assessment  of  the  risks  of  irregularities,  including  any  known  actual,  suspected  or  alleged  instances  of 
fraud; 

45

• 

discussed matters about non-compliance with laws and regulations and how fraud might occur including 
assessment of how and where the financial statements may be susceptible to fraud, as defined in ISA 250B: 
having obtained an understanding of the effectiveness of the control environment. 

All relevant laws and regulations identified at a Group level and areas susceptible to fraud that could have a 
material effect on the financial statements were communicated to component auditors.  Any instances of non-
compliance with laws and regulations identified and communicated by a component auditor were considered in 
our audit approach. 

The most significant laws and regulations were determined as follows: 

Legislation / Regulation 

IFRS/FRS101 and Companies Act 
2006 / Listing Rules 

Tax compliance regulations 

Manufacturing and operational 
regulations 

Additional audit procedures performed by the Group audit 
engagement team and component auditors included:  
Review of the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting 
documentation. 
Review of correspondence with regulators and action taken by the Group 
as a result of this correspondence. 
Completion of disclosure checklists to identify areas of non-compliance. 
Input from a tax specialist was obtained regarding  the Group’s transfer 
pricing arrangement. 
Consideration of whether any matter identified during the audit required 
reporting to an appropriate authority outside the entity. 
ISAs limit the required audit procedures to identify non-compliance with 
these  laws  and  regulations  to  inquiry  of  management  and  where 
appropriate,  those  charged  with  governance  (as  noted  above)  and 
inspection of legal and regulatory correspondence, if any. 

The areas that we identified as being susceptible to material misstatement due to fraud were: 

Risk 

Revenue recognition – over time 
sales 

Revenue recognition – point in 
time sales 

Management override of 
controls  

Audit procedures performed by the audit engagement team:  
Transactions  posted  to  nominal  ledger  codes  outside  of  the  normal 
revenue cycle were identified using a data analytic tool and investigated. 

See also the key audit matters section of this report for work performed 
over this risk. 

Transactions  posted  to  nominal  ledger  codes  outside  of  the  normal 
revenue cycle were identified using a data analytic tool and investigated. 

Revenues at the period end were tested to identify revenue recognised in 
the incorrect period. 

Testing the appropriateness of journal entries and other adjustments;  

Assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting estimates 
are indicative of a potential bias; and 

Evaluating the business rationale of any significant transactions that are 
unusual or outside the normal course of business. 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the Financial 
Reporting  Council’s  website  at:  http://www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities.  This  description  forms  part  of 
our auditor’s report. 
Other matters which we are required to address 
Following the recommendation of the audit committee,  we were appointed by the  Board of Directors on 19 
March 2021 to audit the financial statements for the year ending 30 April 2021 and subsequent financial periods. 

The period of total uninterrupted consecutive appointments is three years, covering the years ended 30 April 
2021 and 30 April 2023. 
The non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the Group or the parent 
Company and we remain independent of the Group and the parent Company in conducting our audit.  

46

 
 
 
 
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit Committee in accordance with ISAs (UK). 

Use of our report  
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006.  Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members 
those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose.  To the fullest 
extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the 
Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 
In due course, as required by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rule 
(DTR)  4.1.14R,  these  financial  statements  will  form  part  of  the  European  Single  Electronic  Format  (ESEF) 
prepared Annual Financial Report filed on the National Storage Mechanism of the UK FCA in accordance with 
the ESEF Regulatory Technical Standard (‘ESEF RTS’).  This auditor’s report provides no assurance over whether 
the annual financial report has been prepared using the single electronic format specified in the ESEF RTS. 

Ian Wall (Senior Statutory Auditor) 

For and on behalf of RSM UK Audit LLP, Statutory Auditor  

Chartered Accountants 

Festival Way 

47

 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

GOODWIN PLC

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF PROFIT OR LOSS 

for the year ended 30th April, 2023

Notes

2023

£’000

2022

£’000 

CONTINUING OPERATIONS

Revenue … … … … … … … … … …

3, 4

185,742

Cost of sales

… … … … … … … … …

(139,521)

GROSS PROFIT… … … … … … … … … …
Distribution expenses … … … … … … … …

Administrative expenses

… … … … … … …

OPERATING PROFIT … … … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … …

Finance costs (net)

Share of profit of associate company

… … … … …

7

14

46,221

(3,741)

(22,167)

20,313

(1,438)

65

144,108 

(101,404) 

42,704 

(3,743) 

(20,654) 

18,307 

(1,169) 

63 

PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION AND MOVEMENT IN FAIR VALUE 
OF INTEREST RATE SWAP*

… … … … … … …

Additonal year-on-year unrealised gain on 
10 year interest rate swap derivative… … … … … …

18,940

17,201 

3,189

2,740 

PROFIT BEFORE TAXATION

… … … … … … …

Tax on profit**  … … … … … … … … …

5

8

22,129

(5,616)

19,941 

(6,321) 

PROFIT AFTER TAXATION… … … … … … … …

16,513

13,620 

ATTRIBUTABLE TO:

Equity holders of the parent  … … … … … … …

Non-controlling interests 

… … … … … … …

15,904

609

12,980 

640 

PROFIT FOR THE YEAR … … … … … … … …

16,513

13,620 

BASIC EARNINGS PER ORDINARY SHARE (in pence) … … …

DILUTED EARNINGS PER ORDINARY SHARE (in pence) … …

9

9

206.81p

169.14p 

206.81p

169.14p 

* The Chairman’s Statement refers to trading profit, which is the profit before taxation less the further positive 

movement in fair value of interest rate swap as trading profit. 

**  The  Group  has  received  significant  benefit  from  the  UK  superdeduction  capital  allowances  programme,   
that has substantially reduced the corporation tax payable in the UK.  For further details, see the additonal  
commentary in note 8.

The notes on pages 54 to 104 form part of these financial statements.

48

 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

GOODWIN PLC

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 

for the year ended 30th April, 2023

PROFIT FOR THE YEAR … … … … … … … … …

OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME / (EXPENSE)

ITEMS THAT MAY BE RECLASSIFIED SUBSEQUENTLY TO PROFIT OR LOSS: 
Foreign exchange translation differences … … … … … …

Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash flow hedges

… …

Ineffectiveness in cash flow hedges transferred to profit or loss … …

Change in fair value of cash flow hedges transferred to profit or loss

…

Effective portion of changes in fair value of cost of hedging … … …

Ineffectiveness in cost of hedging transferred to profit or loss

… …

Change in fair value of cost of hedging transferred to profit or loss … …

Tax (charge) / credit on items that may be reclassified subsequently 
to profit or loss … … … … … … … … … …

2023

£’000

16,513

2022

£’000 

13,620 

(1,412)

3,741

518

1,308

(1,447)

(76)

33

1,493 

(3,834) 

(339) 

(1,432) 

275 

(23) 

(75) 

(919)

1,114 

OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME / (EXPENSE) FOR THE YEAR,  
NET OF INCOME TAX… … … … … … … … … …

1,746

(2,821) 

TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME  FOR THE YEAR … … … …

18,259

10,799 

ATTRIBUTABLE TO:

Equity holders of the parent  … … … … … … … …

Non-controlling interests 

… … … … … … … …

17,726

533

18,259

10,089 

710 

10,799 

The notes on pages 54 to 104 form part of these financial statements.

49

 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

GOODWIN PLC

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 

for the year ended 30th April, 2023

Share-
Trans-
based
lation payment
reserve
£’000

reserve
£’000

Share
capital
£’000

Cash
flow Cost of

hedge hedging Retained
earnings
£’000

reserve
£’000

reserve
£’000

Total
attributable 
to equity
holders of
the parent
£’000

Non- 
controlling
interests
£’000

Total 
equity 
£’000 

YEAR ENDED 
30TH APRIL, 2023

Balance at 1st May, 2022 …

769

463

5,244

(2,746)

140 111,440

115,310

4,433 119,743 

Total comprehensive income:

Profit for the year … …

Other comprehensive income:

Foreign exchange translation 
differences  … … …

Effective portion of changes 
in fair value

Ineffectiveness transferred 
to profit or loss… … …

Change in fair value 
transferred to profit 
or loss … … … …

Tax 

… … … …

TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE 
INCOME / (EXPENSE) 
FOR THE YEAR

Transactions with owners: 

Dividends paid … … …

BALANCE AT 
30TH APRIL, 2023

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(1,312)

-

-

-

-

(1,312)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

3,741

(1,447)

518

(76)

1,274

(1,283)

40

367

15,904

15,904

609

16,513 

-

-

-

-

-

(1,312)

(100)

(1,412) 

2,294

442

1,314

(916)

-

-

2,294 

442 

27

(3)

1,341 

(919) 

4,250

(1,116) 15,904

17,726

533

18,259 

-

-

(8,289)

(8,289)

(556)

(8,845) 

769

(849) 5,244

1,504

(976) 119,055

124,747

4,410 129,157

The notes on pages 54 to 104 form part of these financial statements.

50

 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

GOODWIN PLC

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY (continued) 

for the year ended 30th April, 2022

Share-
Trans-
based
lation payment
reserve
£’000

reserve
£’000

Share
capital
£’000

Cash
flow Cost of

hedge hedging Retained
earnings
£’000

reserve
£’000

reserve
£’000

Total
attributable 
to equity

Non- 
holders of controlling
interests
the parent
£’000
£’000

Total 
equity 
£’000 

YEAR ENDED 
30TH APRIL, 2022

Balance at 1st May, 2021 …

753

(852) 5,244

1,601

(1) 106,396

113,141

4,887 118,028 

Total comprehensive income:

Profit for the year … …

Other comprehensive income:

Foreign exchange translation 
differences  … … …

Effective portion of changes 
in fair value … … …

Ineffectiveness transferred 
to profit or loss

… …

Change in fair value 
transferred to profit 
or loss … … … …

Tax 

… … … …

TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE 
INCOME / (EXPENSE) 
FOR THE YEAR

Transactions with owners: 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

1,315

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(3,790)

275

(333)

(23)

(1,359)

1,135

(64)

(47)

12,980

12,980

640

13,620 

-

-

-

-

1,315

178

1,493 

(3,515)

(44)

(3,559) 

(356)

(6)

(362) 

(1,423)

1,088

(84)

26

(1,507) 

1,114 

-

1,315

-

(4,347)

141

12,980

10,089

710

10,799 

Issue of shares … … …

16

Acquisition of NCI without a 
change in control … …

Dividends paid … … …

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

(74)

16

(74)

(7,862)

(7,862)

-

16 

(356)

(808)

(430) 

(8,670) 

BALANCE AT 
30TH APRIL, 2022

769

463

5,244

(2,746)

140 111,440

115,310

4,433 119,743 

                The notes on pages 54 to 104 form part of these financial statements.

51

 
 
 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

GOODWIN PLC
CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET 
at 30th April, 2023

Notes

2023
£’000

NON-CURRENT ASSETS

… … … … … … …
Property, plant and equipment
… … … … … … … …
Right-of-use assets
Investment in associate
… … … … … … … …
Intangible assets… … … … … … … … … …
Long-term trade receivables … … … … … … … …
Derivative financial assets … … … … … … … … 16, 28

11
12
14
15
18

101,243
6,763
964
25,448
-
5,932

2022
£’000 

87,594 
6,191 
896 
24,817 
1,191 
2,741 

CURRENT ASSETS

Inventories… … … … … … … … … … …
Contract assets … … … … … … … … … …
Trade and other receivables … … … … … … … …
Corporation tax receivable … … … … … … … …
Derivative financial assets … … … … … … … … 19, 28
Cash and cash equivalents … … … … … … … …

17
4
18

20

140,350

123,430 

47,955
16,257
34,589
1,337
2,684
19,661

122,483

40,364 
12,331 
28,647 
1,347 
1,211 
11,651 

95,551 

TOTAL ASSETS … … … … … … … … … …

262,833

218,981 

CURRENT LIABILITIES

… … … … … … … … … …
Borrowings
Contract liabilities
… … … … … … … … …
Trade and other payables … … … … … … … …
Derivative financial liabilities … … … … … … … … 23, 28
Liabilities for current tax
Provisions for liabilities and charges

… … … … … … … …
… … … … … …

21
4
22

24

NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES

… … … … … … … … … …

Borrowings
Derivative financial liabilities … … … … … … … … 25,28
… … … … … …
Provisions for liabilities and charges
Deferred tax liabilities … … … … … … … … …

24
26

21

6,729
32,747
31,765
2,383
921
266

74,811

47,256
-
246
11,363

58,865

TOTAL LIABILITIES… … … … … … … … … …

133,676

2,764 
14,749 
27,260 
2,393 
1,886 
205 

49,257 

40,376 
1,643 
251 
7,711 

49,981 

99,238 

NET ASSETS … … … … … … … … … … …

129,157

119,743 

EQUITY ATTRIBUTABLE TO EQUITY HOLDERS OF THE PARENT

Share capital … … … … … … … … … …
Translation reserve … … … … … … … … …
Share-based payments reserve … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … …
Cash flow hedge reserve
… … … … … … … …
Cost of hedging reserve
… … … … … … … … …
Retained earnings

27
27
27
28
28

769
(849)
5,244
1,504
(976)
119,055

769 
463 
5,244 
(2,746) 
140 
111,440 

TOTAL EQUITY ATTRIBUTABLE TO EQUITY HOLDERS OF THE PARENT

124,747

115,310 

NON-CONTROLLING INTERESTS  … … … … … … …

13

4,410

4,433 

TOTAL EQUITY

… … … … … … … … … …

129,157

119,743 

These  financial  statements  were  approved  by  the  Board  of  Directors  on  7th  August,  2023,  and  signed  on  its   
behalf by: 

T. J. W. Goodwin
Director

M. S. Goodwin
Director

S. R. Goodwin  
Director 

  Company Registration Number: 305907 

The notes on pages 54 to 104 form part of these financial statements. 

52

 
 
              
               
              
               
              
               
              
               
        
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

GOODWIN PLC

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS 

for the year ended 30th April, 2023

CASH FLOW FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES
Profit from continuing operations after tax … … … … … …

16,513

13,620 

Notes

2023
£’000

2022
£’000 

Adjustments for:
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment … … … … …
Depreciation of right-of-use assets … … … … … … …
Amortisation and impairment of intangible assets … … … …
Finance costs (net)
… … … … … … … … …
Currency (gains) / losses net of unhedged derivative movements … …
Loss / (profit) on sale of property, plant and equipment
… … …
Unrealised gain on 10 year interest rate swap derivative … … …
Share of profit of associate company … … … … … …
UK tax incentive credit on research and development… … … …
… … … … … … … … … …
Tax expense

OPERATING CASH FLOW BEFORE CHANGES IN WORKING
CAPITAL AND PROVISIONS

(Increase) in inventories… … … … … … … … …
(Increase) / decrease in contract assets … … … … … …
(Increase) in trade and other receivables … … … … … …
Increase in contract liabilities… … … … … … … …
… … … … … …
Increase in trade and other payables

*

6,272
1,198
1,257
1,438
1,213
134
(3,189)
(65)
(610)
5,616

29,777
(8,377)
(3,804)
(5,304)
17,954
4,072

6,202 
1,192 
1,572 
1,169 
(1,535) 
(18) 
(2,740) 
(63) 
(675) 
6,321 

25,045 
(5,175) 
3,498 
(3,341) 
472 
804 

CASH GENERATED FROM OPERATIONS

… … … … … … … … …
Interest received
Interest paid
… … … … … … … … … …
Corporation tax paid … … … … … … … … …

         34,318
75
(2,015)
(3,251)

21,303               

157 
(1,415) 
(2,051) 

NET CASH INFLOW FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES … … … …

29,127

17,994 

CASH FLOW FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment… … … …
Acquisition of property, plant and equipment … … … … …
Additional investment in existing subsidiaries … … … … …
Acquisition of intangible assets … … … … … … …
Development expenditure capitalised … … … … … …

**

218
(18,871)
-
(675)
(1,196)

341 
(16,215) 
(430) 
(282) 
(1,505) 

NET CASH OUTFLOW FROM INVESTING ACTIVITIES

… … …

(20,524)

(18,091) 

CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES

Issue of shares … … … … … … … … … …
Payment of capital element of lease liabilities … … … … …
Dividends paid … … … … … … … … … …
Dividends paid to non-controlling interests
… … … … …
Proceeds from new loans … … … … … … … …
Repayment of loans and committed facilities … … … … …
Change in bank overdrafts … … … … … … … …

NET CASH OUTFLOW FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES

NET INCREASE / (DECREASE) IN CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS …
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year… … … … …
… … … …
Effect of exchange rate fluctuations on cash held

-
(1,874)
(8,289)
(556)
11,500
(1,181)
119

(281)

8,322
11,651
(312)

16 
(1,153) 
(7,862) 
(808) 
6,702 
(683) 
- 

(3,788) 

(3,885) 
15,160 
376 

CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS AT END OF YEAR … … … …

20

19,661

11,651 

* The majority of contract liabilities are advance payments from customers. 

** The cash flow impact of the additional investment in existing subsidiaries should have been reported within  
cash flows from financing activities.  This has not been amended in the prior year comparative, as the value is not 
material to the Group. 

The notes on pages 54 to 104 form part of these financial statements. 

53

 
 
 
 
              
              
              
               
              
               
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Accounting policies 

Goodwin PLC (the “Company”) is incorporated in England and Wales.  
The Group financial statements consolidate those of the Company and its subsidiaries (together referred to as 
the “Group”) and equity account the Group’s interest in associates.  The parent Company financial statements 
present information about the Company as a separate entity and not about its Group. 
The Group’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with UK adopted International Accounting 
Standards  (IAS)  and  interpretations  issued  by  the  IFRS  Interpretations  Committee  (IFRS  IC)  applicable  to   
companies reporting under UK adopted IFRS.  
The Company has elected to prepare its financial statements in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 
(FRS) 101 issued in the UK.  These are presented on pages 92 to 103.  
The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently to all periods presented in these Group  
financial statements. 
Judgements made by the Directors, in the application of these accounting policies that have significant effect  
on the financial statements and estimates with a possible significant risk of material adjustment in the next  
year are discussed in note 2.  

Going concern 
The Directors, after having reviewed the projections and possible challenges that may lie ahead, believe that 
there is a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence  
for  at  least  twelve  months  from  the  date  of  approval  of  these  financial  statements,  and  have  continued  to   
adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements. 
As at 30th April 2023, the Group’s gearing ratio stood at 26.3% (2022: 25.8%) against a substantial shareholders 
net worth of £125 million (2022: £115 million).  The retained reserves of the Group put it in a strong position to 
deal with unforeseen material adverse issues. 
The  Group  has  continued  to  incur  high  energy  costs  throughout  the  financial  year,  but  it  has  been  able  to   
manage  the  increases  in  costs.    With  the  measures  already  put  in  place  by  the  Group  and  the  continued   
monitoring  of  the  energy  costs  incurred,  we  do  not  see  the  impact  of  energy  costs  giving  rise  to  a  going   
concern  issue.  Furthermore,  the  fact  that  it  is  Group  policy  to  manufacture  and  sell  products  with  high   
technology and high gross margins assists in insulating the Group from high energy costs. 
Within our severe but plausible stress test model, it is demonstrable that the Group has sufficient funds, after  
the  share  buy-back  transaction,  to  cover  the  Group’s  and  the  Company’s  financial  commitments  during  the 
forecast  period  whilst  remaining  compliant  with  its  financial  covenants.    The  stress  test  model  starts  with   
the  forecasts  generated  by  the  subsidiary  directors  and  reflects  their  specific  knowledge  of  the  market   
conditions, strategy and outlook.  Each of these subsidiary level forecasts is then reviewed, challenged and  
approved by the relevant Group Managing Director who themselves are immersed in each of the businesses.  
The stress test model then predicts the impact of a severe but plausible reduction in the pre-tax profit forecast  
by reducing revenues by 18% without adjusting downwards the capital expenditure programme, maintaining  
the overheads at their current expected levels and keeping the financing facilities at the same amounts that  
were in place at year end.  The results of the stress test modelling did not highlight any going concern issues, 
breaches of covenants or requirements for any further financing facilities.  
Whilst our carrying values of trade debtors and contract assets are significant, we see little risk here in terms  
of  recovery.    We  credit  insure  our  debtors  and  our  pre  credit  risk  (work  in  progress),  and  for  significant   
contracts, where credit insurance is not available, we ensure, where possible, that these contracts are backed  
by letters of credit or cash positive milestone payments. 
As discussed elsewhere within these accounts, the Mechanical Engineering order book remains high and the  
Refractory Engineering segment is buoyant.  
The Directors are confident that the Group and Company will have sufficient funds to continue to meet their  
liabilities  as  they  fall  due  for  at  least  twelve  months  from  the  date  of  approval  of  the  financial  statements   
and therefore have prepared the financial statements on a going concern basis. 

Measurement convention 
The financial statements are rounded to the nearest thousand pounds.  The financial statements are based on  
the historical cost basis except where the measurement of balances at fair value is required as below. 

Basis of consolidation 
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group.  Control exists when the Group has the power, directly or  
indirectly, to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities.  
The  Group  controls  an  entity  when  it  is  exposed  to,  or  has  rights  to,  variable  returns  from  its  involvement   
with  the  entity  and  has  the  ability  to  affect  those  returns  through  its  power  over  the  entity.    The  financial   
statements  of  subsidiaries  are  included  in  the  consolidated  financial  statements  from  the  date  that  control   
commences until the date that control ceases.  
Associates are those entities in which the Group has significant influence, but not control, over the financial and 
operating policies.  Significant influence is presumed to exist when the Group holds between 20 and 50 percent 
of the voting power of another entity.  Associates are accounted for using the equity method and are initially 

54

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Accounting policies (continued) 

Basis of consolidation (continued) 
recognised at cost.  The Group's investment includes goodwill identified on acquisition, net of any accumulated 
impairment losses.  The consolidated financial statements include the Group's share of the total recognised  
income  and  expense  and  equity  movements  of  equity  accounted  investees,  from  the  date  that  significant   
influence  commences  until  the  date  that  significant  influence  ceases.    When  the  Group's  share  of  losses   
exceeds  its  interest  in  an  equity  accounted  investee,  the  Group's  carrying  amount  is  reduced  to  nil  and   
recognition  of  further  losses  is  discontinued  except  to  the  extent  that  the  Group  has  incurred  legal  or   
constructive obligations or made payments on behalf of an investee. 

Foreign currency 
The  functional  and  presentational  currency  of  the  Group  is  Pound  Sterling  (£).    Where  foreign  currency   
transactions are hedged, the transactions are recorded at their hedged rate.  All other transactions in foreign  
currencies are translated into the respective functional currencies of the Group entities at the foreign exchange 
rate ruling at the date of the transaction.  Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies  
at the balance sheet date are translated at the foreign exchange rate ruling at that date.  Foreign exchange  
movements  associated  with  hedged  transactions  are  recognised  in  the  cash  flow  hedge  reserve,  whilst   
non-hedged foreign exchange differences arising on translation are recognised in the statement of profit or  
loss within operating profit.  
The  assets  and  liabilities  of  foreign  operations,  including  goodwill  and  fair  value  adjustments  arising  on   
consolidation,  are  translated  to  Pound  Sterling  at  foreign  exchange  rates  ruling  at  the  balance  sheet  date.     
The revenues and expenses of foreign operations are translated at an average rate for the period where this  
rate approximates to the foreign exchange rates ruling at the dates of the transactions. 
Exchange  differences  arising  from  the  translation  of  foreign  operations  are  taken  directly  to  the  translation   
reserve.  They are released into the statement of profit or loss upon disposal of the foreign operation. 

New IFRS standards and interpretations adopted during 2022 / 2023 
The IASB and IFRIC issued the following amendments: 
(cid:129)

Amendments to IFRS 3 Business Combinations; IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment; IAS 37 Provisions,  
Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets; and Annual Improvements 2018-2020 – (effective for periods  
commencing on or after 1st January, 2022). 

The implementation of these amendments has not had a material impact on the Group’s financial statements. 

New IFRS standards and interpretations not adopted 
Amendments to existing standards or new standards and interpretations that have been issued but are not  
yet effective and have not been adopted by the Group are listed below: 
(cid:129)

Amendments  to  IAS  8  Accounting  Policies,  Changes  in  Accounting  Estimates  and  Errors  ‘Definition  of   
Accounting Estimates’ – (effective for periods commencing on or after 1st January, 2023). 
Amendments  to  IAS  1  Presentation  of  Financial  Statements:  Classification  of  Liabilities  as  Current  or   
Non-current  and  Classification  of  Liabilities  as  Current  or  Non-current  -  Deferral  of  Effective  Date  –   
(effective for periods commencing on or after 1st January, 2023, subject to endorsement). 
Amendments to IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements and IFRS Practice Statement 2: Disclosure of  
Accounting Policies – (effective for periods commencing on or after 1st January, 2023). 
Amendments to IAS 12 Income Taxes: Deferred Tax related to Assets and Liabilities arising from a Single  
Transaction – (effective for periods commencing on or after 1st January, 2023). 
Amendments to IAS 1 Non-current liabilities with covenants - (effective for periods on our after 1 January  
2024).  

(cid:129)

(cid:129)

(cid:129)

(cid:129)

The Group does not expect that any standards, amendments or interpretations issued by the IASB, but not  
yet effective, will have a material impact on the financial statements once adopted. 

Revenue  
Revenue is recognised when a customer obtains control of the goods or services i.e. upon the satisfaction of  
a  performance  obligation.    Judgement  is  required  to  determine  the  timing  of  the  transfer  of  control,  and   
whether it is at a point in time or over time.  Where a contract contains several performance obligations then  
the contract is unbundled and each performance obligation is dealt with separately. 
Standard inventory product lines and consumables 
Typically applies to the sale of slurry pumps within the Mechanical Engineering Division and to the whole of the 
Group’s  Refractory  Engineering  Division.    The  revenue  here  relates  to  standard  products  manufactured  for   
sale.    The  performance  obligation  is  satisfied  and  revenue  recognised  at  the  point  when  customers  obtain   
control of the goods in accordance with the International Commercial (INCO) terms agreed.  There are also  
bill and hold arrangements, where control passes to the customer once the customer confirms that the job  
has been completed, but where the goods are yet to be collected and remain at the Company premises. 

55

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Accounting policies (continued) 

Revenue (continued) 
Minimum period contracts for the provision of goods and services 
Predominantly  the  supply  of  broadband  and  related  services  under  minimum  term  contracts.  Performance   
obligations are satisfied over time and revenue is recognised equally over the term of the contract. 
Engineered bespoke products – performance obligations satisfied over time 
Typically applies to the Group’s Mechanical Engineering Division and covers sales orders which are customer  
bespoke, and have a cancel for convenience clause.  This clause then permits the Group subsidiary to claim  
profit  as  the  project  progresses  over  time  to  completion  and  if  the  customer  were  to  trigger  the  cancel  for   
convenience clause within the contract, claim profit from the customer to that point in time.  In such cases, the 
performance  obligations  are  treated  as  satisfied  over  time  (i.e.  as  the  contract  progresses)  and  revenue  is   
taken based on the percentage completion of the contract by the creation of a contract asset.  Work in progress 
is  eliminated  and  replaced  by  a  contract  asset.    Measuring  progress  requires  judgement  as  to  the  stage  of   
completion of each job, and the production of forecasts of costs to complete, which contain allowances for  
technical risks and inherent uncertainties.  The input method is considered to be the most appropriate, because 
costs are the significant indicator of the job performance and expected contract profitability.  Using the input 
method, costs to date are factual and based on job cost records.  As jobs progress through the factories, the  
cost estimate sheets, generated at order placement, are adjusted for known time-based or commodity-based 
variances.  The cost estimate sheets are the source for the calculation of the total estimated costs on a job.   
At both senior and middle management level, there is a high level of continuity and expertise to interrogate  
the costings and so arrive at an appropriate assessment of the total costs on a job, and to then determine the 
percentage of completion for each contract.  The contracts within the Group do not include variable consideration.  
Contract modifications 
Where  the  Group  has  modifications  or  variations  to  a  contract,  then  these  are  included  in  the  contract   
calculations only when there is a high probability that they are certain to occur, which the Group considers  
to be when there is a signed agreement in place. 
Engineered bespoke products – performance obligations satisfied at a point in time 
Typically applies to the Group’s Mechanical Engineering segment and covers sales orders which are customer 
bespoke, but permit the Group subsidiary to claim profit only on completion of the project or only the costs  
incurred  to  date  in  the  event  the  customer  triggers  the  cancel  for  convenience  clause  within  the  contract.   
In such cases, the performance obligation is deemed to be met and revenue taken as order lines are shipped  
in accordance with the relevant shipping terms or via a bill and hold arrangement, whereby control passes to  
the customer, once the customer confirms that the job has been completed, but where the goods are yet to  
be collected, and remain at the Company premises.  
Where the contract period is less that one year, the incremental costs of winning a contract are recognised as  
an expense as they are incurred. 

Contract assets / contract liabilities 
Contract  assets  represent  the  Group’s  rights  to  consideration  for  work  completed  but  not  invoiced  at  the   
reporting date for bespoke product contracts where, as part of the contract terms, there is a termination for  
convenience clause which, if invoked, allows the Group company to charge for profit earned to date.  Contract 
assets are transferred to receivables when the rights to consideration become unconditional, which is generally 
when  the  Group  invoices  the  customer.    Where  payments  are  received  in  advance  and  exceed  the  costs   
incurred  in  constructing  the  asset  together  with  forecast  margin  earned,  the  balances  are  disclosed  as   
contract liabilities. 

Employment costs 
Pension costs 
The Group contributes to a defined contribution pension scheme for UK employees under an Auto Enrolment 
Pension arrangement as required by Government legislation.  The assets of the scheme are held in independently 
administered funds.  Group pension costs are charged to the statement of profit or loss in the year for which  
contributions are payable. 
Contributions to the schemes are made on a monthly basis and at the end of the financial year there were one 
month’s contributions outstanding, which were paid in the following month. 
Termination costs 
Employee termination costs are expended in the profit and loss figures in a year as soon as the expense is known 
and is certain. 
Share-based payment transactions 
Share-based payments arrangements, in which the Group receives goods or services as consideration for its own 
equity instruments, are accounted for as equity-settled share-based payment transactions, regardless of how  
the equity instruments are obtained by the Group. 
The grant date fair value of share-based payment awards granted to employees is recognised as an expense, 
with  a  corresponding  increase  in  equity,  over  the  period  in  which  the  employees  become  unconditionally   
entitled to the awards.  The fair value of the awards is measured using an option valuation model, taking into  
account the terms and conditions upon which the awards were granted. 

56

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Accounting policies (continued)

Financial income and costs 
Financial  expenses  comprise  interest  payable  (together  with  the  amortisation  of  any  facility  arrangement   
fees)  and  interest  on  lease  liabilities  using  the  effective  interest  method.    Borrowing  costs  that  are  directly   
attributable  to  the  acquisition,  construction  or  production  of  an  asset  that  takes  a  substantial  time  to  be   
prepared  for  use  are  capitalised  as  part  of  the  cost  of  that  asset.      Interest  income  and  interest  payable  is   
recognised in the statement of profit or loss as it accrues. 

Taxation 
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax.  Tax is recognised in the statement of 
profit or loss except to the extent that it relates to items recognised directly in equity, in which case it is recognised 
in equity. 
Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively 
enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years. 
Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for  
financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes.  The following temporary differences 
are not provided for: the initial recognition of goodwill, the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect 
neither accounting nor taxable profit other than in a business combination, and differences relating to investments 
in subsidiaries to the extent that they will probably not reverse in the foreseeable future.  The amount of deferred 
tax provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and 
liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.  
A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available 
against which the asset can be utilised. 

Financial instruments 

Measurement 
Trade and other receivables, which do not contain a significant financing component, are measured, initially, 
at  the  transaction  price.    All  other  financial  assets  and  liabilities  are  measured  at  fair  value,  on  initial   
recognition. 
Non-derivative financial assets are measured subsequently at amortised cost if the objective is to hold them 
to collect contractual cash flows and their contractual terms include cash flows on specified dates, which are 
payments of principal and interest. 

Impairment 
The Group has elected to measure loss allowances for trade receivables and contract assets at an amount 
equal  to  lifetime  expected  credit  losses  (ECLs).    Specific  impairments  are  made  when  there  is  a  known   
impairment need against trade receivables and contract assets.  When estimating ECLs, the Group assesses 
reasonable, relevant and supportable information, which does not require undue cost or effort to produce.  
This  includes  quantitative  and  qualitative  information  and  analysis,  incorporating  historical  experience,   
informed  credit  assessments  and  forward-looking  information.    Loss  allowances  are  deducted  from  the   
gross carrying amount of the assets.  Where material, impairment losses related to trade and other receivables, 
including contract assets, are disclosed separately in the statement of profit or loss. 

Principal non-derivative financial assets 
Trade receivables 
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods sold or services performed in the ordinary  
course  of  business.  They  are  recognised  initially  at  the  amount  of  consideration  that  is  unconditional.     
Trade  receivables  are  held  with  the  intention  of  collecting  the  contractual  cash  flows  and  are  measured   
subsequently, therefore, at amortised cost. 
Other financial assets 
Other  financial  assets  principally  comprise  short-term  balances,  which  include  sales  taxes  repayable  to   
the Group.  After being recognised initially at fair value, other receivables are measured, subsequently, at  
amortised cost. The carrying amount of other receivables is considered to be a reasonable approximation  
of their fair value. 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and in hand, together with cash deposits with an original 
maturity of three months or less. 

Principal non-derivative financial liabilities 
Bank borrowings 
Interest-bearing bank loans and overdrafts are measured initially at their fair value less attributable transaction 
costs.  They are carried, subsequently, at amortised cost and finance charges are recognised in the statement 
of profit or loss over the contract term, using an effective rate of interest. 

57

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Accounting policies (continued)

Financial instruments (continued)

Principal non-derivative financial liabilities (continued)

Trade and other payables 
Trade and other payables are recognised initially at fair value, and are subsequently reported at amortised cost. 

Derivative financial assets and liabilities 
Derivative financial assets and liabilities are recognised at fair value.  The fair value of forward exchange  
contracts  is  equal  to  the  present  value  of  the  difference  between  the  contractual  forward  price  and  the   
current  forward  price  for  the  residual  maturity  of  the  contract  adjusted  for  counterparty  credit  risk.     
The recognition of the gain or loss on re-measuring to fair value those forward exchange contracts, which  
are used for hedging, is outlined below; for other forward exchange contracts and the interest rate swap  
derivative, the gain or loss is recognised in the profit or loss. 

Fair value derivation 
IFRS 7 requires that the classification of financial instruments at fair value be determined by reference to the 
source of inputs used to derive the fair value. This classification uses the following three-level hierarchy:   
Level 1 — quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities;  
Level 2 — inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, 
either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices);   
Level 3 — inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs). 
The fair value of derivative financial assets and liabilities is derived using level 2 inputs.  As at the year-end, 
the Group held currency derivatives and an interest rate swap derivative.  For the currency derivatives, the 
valuations  are  based  on  the  period  end  currency  rates,  as  adjusted  for  the  forward  points  to  maturity,   
the  time  value  of  money  and  the  banks’  assessed  credit  risk  and  margin.    For  the  interest  rate  swap   
derivative, the valuation is arrived at by comparing the forward interest curve as at 30th April, 2023 out to  
maturity  against  our  fixed  swap  rate.  The  result  is  then  discounted  for  the  time  value  of  money  and   
adjusted for credit risk and margin. 

Cash flow hedges 
Where a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a recognised 
asset  or  liability,  or  a  highly  probable  forecast  transaction,  the  effective  part  of  any  gain  or  loss  on  the   
derivative  financial  instrument  is  recognised  directly  in  the  hedging  reserve.    Our  hedge  relationships  are   
aligned with our risk management objectives and strategy, resulting in a more qualitative and forward-looking 
approach in ensuring hedge effectiveness.  
For cash flow hedges, the associated cumulative gain or loss on the relevant derivative financial instrument  
is  removed  from  equity  and  recognised  in  the  statement  of  profit  or  loss  in  the  same  period  or  periods   
during  which  the  hedged  forecast  transaction  affects  the  statement  of  profit  or  loss.    Any  identified   
ineffective portion of the hedge is recognised immediately in the statement of profit or loss.  Only the change  
in spot rate is designated as the hedging instrument, with the change in fair value relating to forward points  
being reported separately as deferred costs of hedging within other comprehensive income as permitted by  
IFRS  9.  Where  a  derivative  financial  instrument  is  not  hedge  accounted,  all  changes  in  fair  value  are   
recognised in profit or loss.  
When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, or the entity revokes designation of  
the hedge relationship but the hedged forecast transaction is still expected to occur, the cumulative gain or  
loss  at  that  point  remains  in  equity  and  is  recognised  in  accordance  with  the  above  policy  when  the   
transaction  occurs.    If  the  cash  flow  hedge  transaction  is  no  longer  expected  to  take  place,  the  cumulative   
unrealised  gain  or  loss  recognised  in  equity  is  recognised  in  the  statement  of  profit  or  loss  immediately,   
within cost of sales. 

Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. 
Where parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, they are accounted for as 
separate items of property, plant and equipment. 
Depreciation is charged to the statement of profit or loss over the estimated useful lives of each part of an item 
of property, plant and equipment on the following bases: 
(cid:129)  Freehold land
… … … …
(cid:129)  Freehold buildings … … … …
(cid:129)  Leasehold property
… … …
(cid:129)  Plant and machinery
… … …
(cid:129)  Motor vehicles
… … … …
(cid:129)  Tooling
… … … … …
(cid:129)  Other equipment … … … …
(cid:129)  Assets in the course of construction …

Nil 
2% to 4% on reducing balance or cost  
over period of lease  
5% to 25% on reducing balance or cost 
15% or 25% on reducing balance 
over estimated production life 
15% to 25% on reducing balance or cost 
Nil 

58

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Accounting policies (continued)

the contract involves the use of an identified asset; 
the Group has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefit of using the asset; and  
the Group has the right to direct the use of the asset by deciding how the asset is employed. 

Leases 
Definition of a lease 
A  contract  is  a  lease  or  contains  a  lease  if  it  transfers  the  right  to  use  an  identified  asset  over  the  contract   
term, in exchange for payment.  In determining whether a contract gives the Group the right to use an asset,  
the Group assesses whether: 
(cid:129)
(cid:129)
(cid:129)
Lease term 
The lease term is the non-cancellable period of a lease, and options to extend the lease or terminate it, where it 
is probable that the Group will exercise the available options.  At the start of a lease, the Group makes a judgement 
about whether it is reasonably certain to exercise the options, and reassesses this judgement at every reporting 
period.  Contracts, where the original lease term has expired, with assets continuing to be leased on a short-term 
rolling basis of a few months, are treated as short-term leases. 
Lease balances 
A right-of-use asset and a lease liability are calculated at the beginning of a lease.  The right-of-use asset is  
measured initially at cost, being the opening lease liability, adjusted for any lease payments made by the start  
of the lease, adjusted for any initial direct costs, which have been incurred. 
The lease liability is measured initially at the present value of the lease payments, which are outstanding at  
the start date, discounted at either the rate implicit in the lease or the Group’s incremental borrowing rate.   
With the exception of leases containing an option to purchase, the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate  
as the discount rate.  Lease liabilities are measured at amortised cost, using the effective rate, and adjusted  
as required for any subsequent change to the lease terms. 
The  right-of-use  asset  is  depreciated  on  a  straight-line  basis  over  the  lease  term,  or  from  the  start  date  of   
the lease to the end of the useful life of the right-of-use asset as appropriate.  The method of calculating the  
estimated useful lives of the right-of-use assets and testing for impairment is the same as that for property,  
plant and equipment. 
Recognition exemptions 
Payments for short-term leases, lasting twelve months or less, without a purchase option are reported as an  
operating expense on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. 
The cost of leasing low-value items is reported as an operating expense over the life of the lease. 
Lease portfolios 
The Group has leases for the following types of assets: 
Land and buildings – the Group leases a number of factory buildings, warehouses and office buildings. 
Plant  and  equipment  –  a  number  of  significant  items  of  plant,  such  as  CNC  machines  and  furnaces,  have   
been  leased  under  contracts  with  an  option  to  buy  the  asset  at  the  end  of  the  lease  term.    The  Group  also   
leases motor vehicles.  For motor vehicles the Group has applied the practical expedient in paragraph 15 of  
IFRS  16,  whereby  non-lease  components  have  not  been  separated  from  lease  components,  such  that  lease   
costs and service costs are treated as a single lease component. 
Printers and photocopiers – the Group has applied the recognition exemption for low-value assets to these leases. 

Government grants 
Government grants relating to income are recognised in the statement of profit or loss.  
Government grants relating to assets are recognised in the balance sheet as a deduction in the carrying amount 
of the asset. Depreciation is charged on the value of the asset less the associated grant. 

Intangible assets and goodwill 
All  business  combinations  are  accounted  for  by  applying  the  purchase  method.    Goodwill  is  recognised  as   
the  difference  between  the  consideration  transferred  and  the  fair  value  of  identifiable  assets,  liabilities  and   
contingent liabilities assumed in a business combination. Identifiable intangibles are those which can be sold 
separately or which arise from legal rights regardless of whether those rights are separable. 
Goodwill is stated at cost less any accumulated impairment losses.  Goodwill is allocated to cash-generating 
units and is not amortised but is tested annually for impairment. 
Negative goodwill arising on an acquisition is recognised immediately in the statement of profit or loss. 
Goodwill or negative goodwill resulting from increasing the percentage ownership of an existing subsidiary is 
reported as an equity transaction with owners. 
Expenditure on research activities is recognised in the statement of profit or loss as an expense as incurred. 

59

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

1. Accounting policies (continued)

Intangible assets and goodwill (continued)

Expenditure on development activities is capitalised if the product or process is technically and commercially 
feasible  and  the  Group  has  sufficient  resources  to  complete  development.    The  expenditure  capitalised   
includes the cost of materials, direct labour and an appropriate proportion of overheads.  Other development  
expenditure is recognised in the statement of profit or loss as an expense as incurred.  Capitalised development 
expenditure is stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and impairment losses. 
Other intangible assets that are acquired by the Group are stated at cost less accumulated amortisation and  
impairment losses. 
Amortisation is charged to the statement of profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful  
lives of intangible assets unless such lives are indefinite.  Intangible assets with an indefinite useful life and  
goodwill  are  systematically  tested  for  impairment  at  each  balance  sheet  date.    Other  intangible  assets  are   
amortised from the date they are available for use.  The estimated useful lives are as follows: 
(cid:129) Capitalised development costs
Minimum expected order unit intake or minimum product life 
(cid:129) Manufacturing rights
6 - 15 years 
(cid:129) Brand names and intellectual property 3 - 20 years 
(cid:129) Customer lists
2 - 10 years 
(cid:129) Order book
1 year 
(cid:129) Distribution rights
25 years 
(cid:129) Software and licences
3 - 5 years  
(cid:129) Non-compete agreements
15 years 

Impairment of intangibles 
The carrying amounts of the Group’s assets are reviewed at each balance sheet date to determine whether  
there  is  any  indication  of  impairment.    If  any  such  indication  exists,  the  asset’s  recoverable  amount  is   
estimated.  Recoverable  amount  is  the  greater  of  an  asset’s  or  cash-generating  unit’s  CGU  fair  value  less   
costs to sell or value in use. 
For goodwill, assets that have an indefinite useful life and intangible assets that are not yet available for use,  
the recoverable amount is estimated at each balance sheet date. 
An  impairment  loss  is  recognised  whenever  the  carrying  amount  of  an  asset  or  its  cash-generating  unit   
exceeds its recoverable amount.  Impairment losses are recognised in the statement of profit or loss. 
Reversals of impairment 
An impairment loss in respect of goodwill is not reversed.  
In respect of other assets, an impairment loss is reversed when there is an indication that the impairment loss 
may no longer exist and there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount. 
An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset of CGU’s carrying amount does not exceed  
the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or amortisation, if no impairment  
loss had been recognised. 

Inventories 
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value.  Cost is based on the first-in, first-out principle 
and  includes  expenditure  incurred  in  acquiring  the  inventories  and  bringing  them  to  their  existing  location   
and  condition.  In  the  case  of  manufactured  inventories  and  work  in  progress,  cost  includes  an  appropriate   
share of overheads based on normal operating capacity. 

Provisions 
General provisions 
A provision is recognised in the balance sheet when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation  
as a result of a past event, and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle  
the  obligation.    If  the  effect  is  material,  provisions  are  determined  by  discounting  the  expected  future  cash   
flows  at  a  pre-tax  rate  that  reflects  current  market  assessments  of  the  time  value  of  money  and,  where   
appropriate, the risks specific to the liability. 
Warranty provisions 
The Group carries a warranty provision where applicable.  The warranties are committed at contract placement 
stage  and  typically,  where  given  to  a  customer,  the  warranty  has  a  duration  of  between  1  and  3  years.   
At the expiry of the warranty period, to the extent not utilised, the warranty provision is then released back  
into the statement of profit or loss.  The warranties are generally passive in nature confirming that the goods  
comply with contractual specifications and given the incidence of product failure is low, the warranties have  
no tangible customer value. 

60

 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

2. Accounting estimates and judgements 

The  Group  makes  judgements  and  estimates  in  applying  the  Group’s  accounting  policies,  to  prepare  the   
financial statements.  The Directors do not believe there have been any key judgements exercised during the  
period, but see the following as the key estimates considered.  

Key estimates and judgements 

IFRS 15 Revenue Recognition 

The  Directors  consider  that  a  key  estimate,  which  may  have  a  material  impact  on  the  financial  statements,   
is in relation to IFRS 15 and, in particular, where we are mandated to account on a revenue over time basis  
on some of our mechanical engineering work in progress contracts.  When reviewing the terms of contracts  
with customers, judgement is required to assess the number of performance obligations within the contracts  
and when to recognise contract provisions. 
For  contracts  where  revenue  is  recognised  over  time,  there  is  a  need  to  estimate  the  costs  to  complete  on   
these contracts.  The costs to complete estimates can be complex, as they need to consider several variable 
factors such as the impact of delays, cost overruns and also any variations to contract.  Once complete, these  
estimates  then  drive  the  amount  of  revenue  recognised.    The  estimates  are  prepared  and  reviewed  by   
management  with  suitable  experience  and  qualifications,  and  who  endeavour  to  ensure  the  revenue   
mandated  to  be  recognised  prior  to  the  completion  of  the  contract  is  not  under  or  overstated,  based  on   
possible technical risks and inherent uncertainties.   
Whilst cost to complete estimates are based on management’s best knowledge at the time, it is clear, due to  
the  very  nature  of  an  estimate  that  the  eventual  outcomes  may  differ  due  to  unforeseen  events.    However,   
the  advanced  stage  of  completion  of  a  number  of  contracts  reduces  the  risk  of  unforeseen  events  arising,   
and  given  that  the  initial  position  taken  on  material  contracts  at  the  balance  sheet  date  is  revisited  as  part   
of  the  post  balance  sheet  review  process  prior  to  the  financial  statements  being  signed  off,  we  would   
conclude that the risk of a material impact on the financial statements arising from changes in estimates here  
is low.  If the costs to complete contracts, that had not been completed as at the year end, were 1% higher  
than estimated at the year-end, for which this increase in costs could not be passed on to the customer, then  
the impact to the current year’s revenue would be £328,000. 
Where there are claims which are subject to commercial negotiation, these are recognised only when there  
is a high level of certainty, which the Group considers this to be when there is a signed agreement in place.    
Consideration  is  given  to  the  requirements  of  IFRS15  in  determining  the  appropriate  accounting  for  the   
claim settlements which takes into account the nature of the settlement and whether it relates to a point in  
time or over time revenue contract. 

Determination of the basis for the amortisation / impairment of intangible assets 

The  Group  carries  different  classes  of  intangible  assets  on  its  balance  sheet,  which  include  goodwill,   
manufacturing  rights,  brand  names  and  development  costs.    Capitalised  intangible  costs  are  amortised  on   
a  straight-line  basis,  which  commences  when  the  Group  is  expected  to  benefit  from  cash  inflows.    A  key   
estimate is required in determining the useful economic life over which each asset is to be amortised, with  
current  timeframes  ranging  from  fifteen  to  twenty-five  years.  In  arriving  at  the  appropriate  timeframe  for   
amortisation, there are essentially two key estimates, namely the product life cycle and the amount of profit  
generated from the expected income streams.  In terms of sensitivity, then, in regard to the intangible assets  
other than goodwill, if we were to assume assets with estimated useful lives of fifteen years or more were  
reduced by one third, then the pre tax profit and loss impact on the current year reported figures would be to  
reduce profits by £488,000 (2022: £471,000). In accordance with IAS 38, the basis on which goodwill / intangible 
assets are impaired / amortised is assessed annually.  Sensitivity as regards goodwill is considered within note 
15 to these financial statements. 
Apart from above, the Group does not have any key assumptions concerning the future, or other key sources  
of  estimation  uncertainty  in  the  reporting  period  that  may  have  a  significant  risk  of  causing  a  material   
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year. 

Duvelco viability 

The Company has invested circa £14 million in the area of high performance polymer resins.  The Company  
will  commence  a  period  of  testing  and  commissioning  of  the  plant  in  Q2  and  Q3  of  financial  year  2024   
before any commercial activity takes place.  The judgement of the Board is that the market potential here is  
significant and that future profitability is expected to be strong. Accordingly, the Directors do not see a need  
to impair our investment in this area. 

Other estimates and judgements 

Other than as reported above, the Directors do not consider there to be any key estimates or judgements in  
preparing the financial statements.  The estimates and judgements outlined below formed the main areas of  
focus for the Directors throughout the year. 

Inventory provisions 

The  Group's  Directors  in  conjunction  with  senior  management  in  the  subsidiaries  regularly  review  the   
recoverability  of  their  stated  raw  material  and  work  in  progress  balances,  paying  particular  attention  to  net   
realisable  value  and  stock  obsolescence  issues.    The  estimates  are  in  relation  to  costs  to  complete  and  the   
expected level of future sales orders for slow moving stocks.  Where it is judged that a provision is deemed  
necessary,  the  appropriate  adjustments  are  made  in  the  relevant  subsidiary's  books  at  the  time  a  shortfall   
is identified. 

61

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

2. Accounting estimates and judgements (continued)

Other estimates and judgements (continued)

Trade receivable provisions 

Whilst trade debtors are insured wherever possible, the Directors are able to exercise judgement in relation to 
non-credit insured contracts as set out in note 28 (a).  The Group Directors, in conjunction with the subsidiary 
credit  controllers,  closely  monitor  the  adherence  to  payment  terms  across  all  accounts  (whether  insured  or   
not) and make provision for any losses that are likely to materialise.  There is a requirement under IFRS 9 to  
consider the statistical likelihood of a bad debt based off previous experience.  Historically, the Group’s bad  
debt  write  offs  have  been  negligible  and  the  Group  results  are  not  impacted  by  this  requirement  for  a   
statistically based provision.

62

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

3. Segmental information

Products and services from which reportable segments derive their revenues 
For reporting to the chief operating decision maker, the Board of Directors, and as outlined in the Business  
Model  section  of  the  Strategic  Report  on  page  8,  the  Group  is  organised  into  two  reportable  operating   
segments  according  to  the  different  products  and  services  provided  by  the  Mechanical  Engineering  and   
Refractory Engineering Divisions. Segment assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to segments 
as well as group centre balances which can be allocated on a reasonable basis.  Associates are included in  
Refractory  Engineering.  In  accordance  with  the  requirements  of  IFRS  8,  information  regarding  the  Group’s   
operating segments is reported below.   
In  previous  years  the  segmental  analysis  of  net  assets,  capital  expenditure  and  depreciation  was  based  on   
the  legal  structure  of  the  Group.    This  year,  the  analysis  represents  the  operational  structure  of  the  Group   
and  the  prior  year  comparatives  have  been  updated  accordingly.    There  are  no  other  reportable  segments   
apart from those identified.

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Mechanical
Engineering
£’000

Refractory
Engineering
£’000

Total
£’000

Mechanical
Engineering
£’000

Refractory
Engineering
£’000

Total 
£’000 

Revenue

External sales … …

123,767

61,975

185,742

Inter-segment sales …

23,771

18,365

42,136

87,605

17,784

56,503

15,523

144,108 

33,307 

Total revenue … …

147,538

80,340

227,878

105,389

72,026

177,415 

Reconciliation to consolidated revenue:

Inter-segment sales …

Consolidated revenue for the year

(42,136)

185,742

(33,307) 

144,108

Profits

Mechanical Engineering …

Refractory Engineering …

…

…

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

£’000

£’000

49

51

12,171

12,772

£’000

42

58

£’000

9,139 

12,657 

Segment operating profit

100

24,943

100

21,796 

Group centre … … …

…

Group operating profit

Finance costs (net) … …

Share of profit of Refractory 
associate company … …

…

…

Profit before taxation and  
movement in fair value of 
interest rate swap

Unrealised gain on 10 year  
interest rate swap derivative

…

Profit before tax

Tax on profit … … …

…

Profit after tax

(3,489) 

18,307 

(1,169) 

63

17,201

2,740

19,941

(6,321)

13,620

(4,630)

20,313

(1,438)

65

18,940

3,189

22,129

(5,616)

16,513

63

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

3. Segmental information (continued)

Products and services from which reportable segments derive their revenues (continued)

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Group Mechanical Refractory
centre Engineering Engineering
£’000
£’000
£’000

Total
£’000

Group Mechanical Refractory
centre Engineering Engineering
£’000
£’000
£’000

Total 
£’000 

Net assets

Total assets
Total liabilities

18,644
(2,821)

175,023
(103,234)

262,833
69,166
(27,621) (133,676)

18,493
(2,595)

141,995
(77,211)

58,493 218,981 
(99,238) 
(19,432)

Total

15,823

71,789

41,545

129,157

15,898

64,784

39,061 119,743

For  the  purposes  of  monitoring  segment  performance  and  allocating  resources  between  segments,  the   
Group's Board of Directors monitors the tangible and financial assets attributable to each segment.  All assets 
and  liabilities  are  allocated  to  reportable  segments  with  the  exception  of  some  of  those  held  by  the  parent   
Company, Goodwin PLC.

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Group Mechanical Refractory
centre Engineering Engineering
£’000
£’000
£’000

Total
£’000

Group Mechanical
Refractory
centre Engineering Engineering
£’000
£’000
£’000

Total 
£’000 

Segmental capital expenditure

Property, 
plant and 
equipment

Right-of-use 
assets

Intangible 
assets

630

220

11

15,623

4,928 21,181

1,868

9,596

4,889

16,353 

1,233

66

1,519

508

1,305

1,824

419

64

2,423

1,121

881

3,723 

602

1,787 

Total

861

17,364

6,299 24,524

2,351

13,140

6,372

21,863

Segmental depreciation, amortisation and impairment

Depreciation

1,070

4,872

1,528

7,470

1,046

4,643

1,705

7,394 

Amortisation 
and impairment

64

446

747

1,257

123

668

781

1,572 

Total

1,134

5,318

2,275

8,727

1,169

5,311

2,486

8,966

Geographical segments 
The  Group  operates  in  the  following  principal  locations.    In  presenting  the  information  on  geographical   
segments, revenue is based on the location of its customers and assets on the location of the assets.

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Revenue
£’000

55,867

28,367

19,854

34,725

46,929

UK*

Rest of  Europe

USA

Pacific Basin

Rest of World

Net
assets
£’000

Non-

Capital
current expendi-
ture
£’000

assets
£’000

82,669

114,235

21,533

10,636

4,224

-

15,982

19,870

-

7,029

8,930

790

-

330

1,871

Net
assets
£’000

Non-
current
assets
£’000

77,447

102,254

8,648

3,728

-

15,867

17,781

-

6,703

8,004

Capital 
expendi- 
ture 
£’000 

19,670 

1,009 

- 

278 

906 

Revenue
£’000

38,599

21,388

14,046

31,085

38,990

Total

185,742

129,157

134,418

24,524

144,108

119,743

120,689

21,863

* The prior year comparative for non-current assets has been adjusted to remove £2,741,000 of derivative assets.

64

 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

4. Revenue 

The following tables provide an analysis of revenue by geographical market and by product line. 

Geographical market

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Mechanical
Refractory
Engineering Engineering
£’000

£’000

Mechanical

Refractory
Total Engineering Engineering
£’000
£’000
£’000

UK

Rest of  Europe

USA

Pacific Basin

Rest of World

Total

Product lines

41,112

21,269

19,141

12,253

29,992

14,755

55,867

7,098

28,367

713

19,854

22,472

34,725

16,937

46,929

123,767

61,975 185,742

25,261

13,304

13,398

9,457

26,185

87,605

Total 
£’000 

38,599 

21,388 

14,046

31,085 

38,990 

13,338

8,084

648

21,628

12,805

56,503

144,108

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Mechanical
Refractory
Engineering Engineering
£’000

£’000

Mechanical

Refractory
Total Engineering Engineering
£’000
£’000
£’000

Total 
£’000 

Standard products and 
consumables

Bespoke products – point in time

13,767

30,002

61,975

75,742

-

30,002

12,155

9,992

56,503

68,658 

-

9,992 

Point in time revenue

43,769

61,975 105,744

22,147

56,503

78,650 

Minimum period contracts

Bespoke products – over time

Over time revenue

4,335

75,663

79,998

-

-

-

4,335

75,663

3,804

61,654

79,998

65,458

-

-

-

3,804 

61,654 

65,458 

Total revenue

123,767

61,975 185,742

87,605

56,503

144,108

The  following  table  present  information  about  receivables,  work  in  progress,  contract  assets  and  liabilities   
from contracts with customers.
2022 
£’000 
22,529 
1,191 
10,161 
12,331 
(14,749) 

Trade receivables due within one year (note 18) … … … … … …
Trade receivables due after more than one year (note 18) … … … … …
Work in progress (note 17) … … … … … … … … … …
Contract assets
… … … … … … … … … … …
Contract liabilities … … … … … … … … … … …

28,094
-
13,001
16,257
(32,747)

2023
£’000

24,605

31,463

The Mechanical Engineering segment of the Group contains large non-seasonal contracts, and so significant  
variations are to be expected in the trade receivable, contract assets, work in progress and contract liabilities  
balances.  These large high value contracts arrive at various points during the year and factors such as percentage 
complete and the level of milestone payments received to date influence the positions shown at each year end.  
Work in progress balances relate to point in time contracts with contract assets relating to over time contracts.  
In the early of stages of a contract, there are often significant contract liabilities due to milestone payments  
received from customers.  As contracts progress, work in progress and contract asset balances increase and  
contract liabilities decrease.   The large increase in the contract liabilities during the year is due to the Group  
receiving £13.1 million of down payments close to the year end for two contracts, on which the Group has  
not yet commenced work.

65

 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

4. Revenue (continued)

Product lines (continued)

Revenue recognised in the year, which was included in the contract liability 
balance at the beginning of the period … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000

2022 
£’000 

7,711

7,182 

Revenue recognised from performance obligations, which were satisfied 
(or partially satisfied) in previous periods* … … … … … … …

5,259

3,794 

Increased costs on contracts** … … … … … … … … …

(995)

(1,145) 

Release of increased cost of contracts**…

… … … … … …

-

1,284 

* These figures relate to contract modifications, which are recognised only when there is a high level of certainty. 
** During the year the Group recognised additional costs on contracts that were over and above the forecasted 

costs for those contracts, which reduces revenue in the year.  These contracts still remain profitable. 

The Group reviewed the contract assets at year end and for all contracts did not have to make any impairment  
provision. 
Incremental costs of obtaining contracts lasting less than one year, are recognised as an expense, when incurred, 
in accordance with the practical expedient in IFRS 15, paragraph 94.  
The Group’s revenue is not significantly impacted by seasonal or cyclical events.   The potential risk of the loss  
of any key customer is limited as, typically, no single customer accounts for more than 10% of annual turnover. 

Performance obligations

A performance obligation is the value of work still to complete on a contract. 
The  aggregate  amount  of  the  transaction  price  allocated  to  the  performance  obligations  for  longer-term   
contracts, which are unsatisfied (or partially unsatisfied) as at the end of the reporting period is shown below. 

Performance obligations due to be satisfied within one year … … … …
Performance obligations due to be satisfied between 2-3 years … … … …
Performance obligations due to be satisfied between 4-5 years … … … …
Performance obligations due to be satisfied after more than 5 years … … …

2023
£’000

42,316
59,575
33,494
10,644

2022 
£’000 
40,114 
17,746 
19,959 
- 

146,029

77,819

The Group has applied the practical expedient in IFRS 15, paragraph 121, and has not disclosed the remaining 
performance obligations for contracts which have an original expected duration of one year or less.   

66

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

5. Expenses and auditor’s remuneration 

The following are included in profit before taxation:

Charged / (credited) to the statement of profit or loss
Depreciation:

Owned assets … … … … … … … … … … …
Right-of-use assets … … … … … … … … … …
… … … … …
Amortisation and impairment of intangible assets
… … … … …
Loss / (profit) on sale of other tangible fixed assets
Research expenditure … … …  … … … … … … …
(Reversal) / impairment of trade receivables 
charged to the statement of profit or loss … … … … … … …
Realised currency gains … … … … … … … … … …
Unrealised currency losses / (gains) … … … … … … … …
Mark to market currency derivative losses …
… … … … …
Hedge reserve ineffectiveness … … … … … … … … …
Fees receivable by the auditor and the auditor’s associates in respect of:

Audit of these financial statements … … … … … … …
Audit of the financial statements of subsidiaries … … … … …
Expenses relating to short-term property leases … … … … … …
Expenses relating to short-term plant and equipment leases … … … …
Expenses relating to leases of low-value assets … … … … … …
Government grants received … … … … …  … … … …

2023
£’000

6,272
1,198
1,257
134
3,783

(237)
(678)
615
156
442

80
344
300
188
11
(331)

2022 
£’000 

6,202 
1,192 
1,572 
(18) 
4,507 

188 
(202) 
(2,385) 
1,212 
(362) 

66 
282 
304 
130 
12 
(397)

The analysis of the mark to market currency derivative losses and hedge ineffectiveness has been corrected for 
the previous year.  The mark to market derivative gains / losses and ineffectiveness are reported within cost  
of sales.

6. Staff numbers and costs 

The  average  number  of  persons  employed  by  the  Group  (including  Directors)  during  the  year,  analysed  by   
category, was as follows: 

2023
Number

2022 
Number 

Subsidiary employees … … … … … … … … … …
Goodwin PLC Company employees … … … … … … … …

The aggregate payroll costs of these persons were as follows:

Wages and salaries … … … … … … … … … …
Social security costs… … … … … … … … … …
Other pension costs … … … … … … … … … …

Payroll costs are reported as follows:

Cost of sales … … … … … … … … … … …
Administrative expenses … … … … … … … … …

1,093
51

1,144

2023
£’000

44,125
4,489
1,461

50,075

2023
£’000

36,783
13,292

50,075

1,062 
50 

1,112 

2022 
£’000 

38,894 
4,513 
1,338 

44,745 

2022 
£’000 

31,707 
13,038 

44,745 

Details of the Directors’ remuneration can be found within the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 34 to 36. 
The emoluments of the highest paid Director were £406,000 (2022: £374,000).  The number of Directors, who  
were members of a defined contribution pension scheme on 30th April, 2023 was 3 (2022: 6).

67

 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

7. Finance costs (net)

Interest income … … … … … … … … … … …

Interest expense on lease liabilities … … … … … … … …
Interest expenses on bank loans and overdrafts … … … … … …
Capitalised interest on assets in the course of construction … … … …

2023
£’000

93

266
1,756
(491)

Interest expense … … … … … … … … … … …

1,531

Finance costs (net) … … … … … … … … … …

1,438

2022 
£’000 

157 

121 
1,292 
(87) 

1,326 

1,169 

The average interest rate used to calculate capitalised interest was 3.13% (2022: 2.57%).  This takes into account 
the benefit of the interest rate swap.

8. Taxation 

Recognised in the statement of profit or loss

Current tax expense

Current year … … … … … … … … … … …
Under / (over) provision in prior years … … … … … … …

Deferred tax expense

… … … … … … … …

Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
   – current year (see below)
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
   – current year rate differences … … … … … … … …
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
   – under / (over) provision in prior years … … … … … …
Origination and reversal of temporary differences  
     – rate change to prior year (see below) … … … … … …

Total tax expense … … … … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000

2,678
191

2,869

2022 
£’000 

2,820 
193 

3,013 

1926

1,381 

596

225

-

2,747

5,616

- 

(85) 

2,012 

3,308 

6,321 

UK corporation tax 

The  tax  charge  on  the  face  of  the  profit  and  loss  is  the  tax  applicable  to  the  profits  of  each  Group  company   
calculated  at  their  country  tax  rate.  Due  to  the  high  capital  expenditure  of  the  UK  element  of  the  Group,   
where there are, in the UK, 100% first year allowances and the Super Deduction tax scheme that the UK Group 
companies could utilise in the year, this has meant for certain assets there was a combined 130% deduction  
against taxable profits.  This has resulted in a lower amount of tax paid in the UK for both financial year 2022  
and  financial  year  2023  and  a  significant  deferred  tax  charge  of  50%  of  the  calculated  tax,  which  will  not  be   
paid until some time in the future. 

Origination and reversal of temporary differences – current year 

The  majority  of  the  deferred  tax  expense  shown  above  comes  from  the  difference  between  the  accounting   
treatment  and  the  tax  treatment  of  property,  plant  and  equipment  expenditure.    Under  the  current  UK  tax   
regime, most of our property, plant and equipment expenditure is 100% offset against our profits in the year of  
expenditure and so produces a very low or zero rate of tax actually payable.  In future years, however, the tax  
benefit  gained  in  year  one  reverses  over  time  as  future  profits  are  taxed  without  further  offset  from  this   
expenditure. 

Origination and reversal of temporary differences – rate change to prior year 

With  the  change  in  UK  tax  rate  to  25%,  all  the  provisions  have  been  calculated  at  the  new  rate  in  line  with   
legislation.

68

 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

8. Taxation (continued)

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

Profit before taxation … … … … … … … … … …

Tax using the UK corporation tax rate of 19.49% (2022: 19%) … … … …
Tax effect of amounts which are not deductible / (taxable) 
    in calculating taxable income:
Impact of super-deduction on property, plant and equipment additions … …
… … … … … … … … … …
Non-taxable income
Non-deductible expenses
… … … … … … … … …
Other permanent timing differences … … … … … … … …
Under provision in prior years … … … … … … … … …
Losses not recognised … … … … … … … … … …
Share-based payments … … … … … … … … … …
Losses utilised where a deferred tax asset was not recognised
… … …
Rate change to prior year
… … … … … … … … …
Rate differences … … … … … … … … … … …
Withholding tax unrelieved … … … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … …
Difference in overseas tax rates
Effect of equity accounting for associate … … … … … … …

2023
£’000
22,129

4,313

(337)
(17)
59
(20)
416
160
-
-
-
596
261
199
(14)

Total tax expense … … … … … … … … … … …

5,616

2022 
£’000
19,941 

3,789 

(506) 
(27) 
30 
295 
108 
171 
(40) 
(151) 
2,012 
- 
355 
297 
(12) 

6,321 

Where subsidiary companies have incurred losses in the year, which are unlikely to be relieved against future 
profits in the next twelve months, deferred tax assets are not recognised.  
Withholding  tax  unrelieved  represents  withholding  tax  deducted  on  dividends  and  royalties  from  overseas   
subsidiaries and associates. 

Deferred tax recognised directly in equity 

Deferred tax (charge) / credit on the cash flow hedge included 
in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income

… … … …

9. Earnings per share

2023
£’000

2022 
£’000 

(919)

1,114

Number of 
ordinary shares 

2023

2022 

Ordinary shares in issue 
Opening shares in issue … … … … … … … … … … 7,689,600
-
Shares issued in the year (note 27) … … … … … … … …

7,526,400 

163,200 

Total ordinary shares (issued and options) … … … … … … 7,689,600

7,689,600 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue … … … … … 7,689,600

7,673,951 

Relevant profits attributable to ordinary shareholders … … … … …

Basic earnings per share … … … … … … … … … …

Diluted earnings per share

… … … … … … … … …

10. Dividends

Paid ordinary dividends during the year in respect of prior years
107.80p (2022: 102.24p) per qualifying ordinary share … … … … …

2023
£’000

15,904

2023
pence

206.81

206.81

2023
£’000

8,289

2022 
£’000 

12,980 

2022 
pence 

169.14 

169.14

2022 
£’000 

7,862 

After the balance sheet date an ordinary dividend of 115p per qualifying ordinary share was proposed by the  
Directors (2022: Ordinary dividend of 107.80p). 
The proposed current year ordinary dividend of £8,636,000 has not been provided for within these financial  
statements (2022: Proposed ordinary dividend of £8,289,000 was not provided for within the comparative  
figures).

69

 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

11. Property, plant and equipment 

Cost

Balance at 1st May, 2021 … … …
Additions … … … … … …
Reclassification … … … … …
Disposals … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … …

41,998
5,814
3,737
(6)
661

81,579
2,653
1,721
(1,205)
245

Other
Plant and equipment

Land and
buildings machinery
£’000

£’000

Assets in 
course of
construc- 
tion
£’000

7,779
7,371
(5,338)
-
53

Total 
£’000 

138,311 
16,353 
- 
(1,873)
1,042 

£’000

6,955
515
(120)
(662)
83

Balance at 30th April, 2022 … …

52,204

84,993

6,771

9,865

153,833 

Depreciation

Balance at 1st May, 2021 … … …
Charged in year … … … … …
Disposals … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … …

9,226
1,345
-
139

46,857
4,413
(903)
105

5,165
444
(647)
95

Balance at 30th April, 2022 … …

10,710

50,472

5,057

-
-
-
-

-

61,248 
6,202 
(1,550) 
339 

66,239 

Net book value

At 1st May, 2021

… … … …

32,772

34,722

1,790

7,779

77,063 

At 30th April, 2022 … … … …

41,494

34,521

1,714

9,865

87,594

Cost

Balance at 1st May, 2022 … … …
Additions … … … … … …
Reclassification – others … … …
… … …
Transfer to / from ROU*
Disposals … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … …

52,204
633
-
-
-
(461)

84,993
3,692
3,612
(336)
(1,935)
(228)

6,771
364
37
191
(719)
(68)

9,865
16,492
(3,649)
-
-
(71)

153,833 
21,181 
- 
(145) 
(2,654)
(828) 

Balance at 30th April, 2023 … …

52,376

89,798

6,576

22,637

171,387 

Depreciation

Balance at 1st May, 2022 … … …
Charged in year … … … … …
Transfer to / from ROU*
… … …
Disposals … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … …

10,710
1,437
-
(3)
(82)

50,472
4,335
14
(1,699)
(45)

5,057
500
94
(600)
(46)

Balance at 30th April, 2023 … …

12,062

53,077

5,005

-
-
-
-
-

-

66,239 
6,272 
108 
(2,302) 
(173) 

70,144 

Net book value

At 30th April, 2023

… … …

40,314

36,721

1,571

22,637

101,243 

*Assets are transferred from the right-of-use assets category on the settlement of a lease purchase agreement 
and payment of the option to purchase fee. 

Additions 
During  the  year  the  Group  expended  £21.18  million  on  property,  plant  and  equipment.    The  major  items   
purchased during the year are expenditures on the infrastructure works for Goodwin Steel Castings; on our  
new calciner plant at Hoben and plant for Duvelco. 

Other equipment 
Other equipment comprises motor vehicles, IT hardware and office equipment.

70

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

11. Property, plant and equipment (continued)

Assets in course of construction 

Land and buildings
… … … … … … … … … …
Plant and machinery … … … … … … … … … …

Depreciation 

Depreciation is reported as follows:

Cost of sales
Administrative expenses

… … … … … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000

4,280
18,357

22,637

2023
£’000

6,068
204

6,272

2022 
£’000 

1,823 
8,042 

9,865

2022 
£’000 

5,942 
260 

6,202

Security 
Noreva  GmbH's  land  and  buildings,  with  a  net  book  value  of  £2.9  million (2022: £2.6 million),  and  other  land   
within  the  Group  with  a  net  book  value  of  £4.5  million (2022: £4.5 million)  have  been  pledged  as  security  for   
borrowings listed in note 21.  The Group has also pledged three furnaces, with a net book value of £4.8 million  
(2022: £5.1 million) and a calciner with a net book value of £5.3 million (2022: £nil) as security for bank loans.

12. Right-of-use assets 

Cost

Land and 
buildings
£’000

Plant and
machinery
£’000

Other 
equipment
£’000

Balance at 1st May, 2021
… … …
Additions    … … … … … …
Disposals    … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … …

2,728
123
(107)
17

721
3,215
(35)
(18)

1,459
385
-
(2)

Total 
£’000  

4,908  
3,723  
(142) 
(3) 

Balance at 30th April, 2022

2,761

3,883

1,842

8,486 

Depreciation

Balance at 1st May, 2021… … … …
Charged in year … … … … …
Disposals    … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … …

Net book value

At 1st May, 2021 … … … … …

At 30th April, 2022 … … … …

Cost

Balance at 1st May, 2022
… … …
Additions    … … … … … …
Transfer to / from property, plant and equipment
Disposals    … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … …

785
457
(107)
(1)

1,134

1,943

1,627

2,761
6
-
(79)
(42)

224
351
-
(5)

570

497

3,313

3,883
1,316
336
(107)
24

208
384
-
(1)

1,217  
1,192 
(107) 
(7) 

591

2,295 

1,251

3,691  

1,251

6,191  

1,842
197
(191)
(24)
5

8,486  
1,519  
145 
(210) 
(13) 

Balance at 30th April, 2023

2,646

5,452

1,829

9,927 

Depreciation

Balance at 1st May, 2022
… … …
Charged in year … … … … …
Transfer to property, plant and equipment
Disposals    … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … …

Balance at 30th April, 2023

Net book value

1,134
480
-
(79)
(24)

1,511

570
289
(14)
(107)
10

748

591
429
(94)
(24)
3

2,295  
1,198 
(108) 
(210) 
(11) 

905

3,164 

At 30th April, 2023

1,135

4,704

924

6,763

71

 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

12. Right-of-use assets (continued)

Depreciation 

Depreciation is reported as follows:

Cost of sales
Administrative expenses

… … … … … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000

731
467

1,198

2022 
£’000 

735 
457 

1,192

13. Investments in subsidiaries 

The Group has the following principal subsidiaries. Non-principal subsidiaries are listed in note 30:  

Registered Country of
address*

Incorporation

Class of 
shares held

% held 

Company name

Subsidiaries:
Mechanical Engineering:
Goodwin Steel Castings Limited
… … …
Goodwin International Limited … … … …
Easat Radar Systems Limited … … … …
Goodwin Korea Company Limited … … …
… …
Goodwin Pumps India Private Limited
Goodwin Shanghai Company Limited … … …
Noreva GmbH
… … … … … …
Goodwin Indústria e Comércio de Bombas 
8
Submersas Ltda … … … … … …
1
Internet Central Limited … … … … …
9
Goodwin Submersible Pumps Australia Pty. Limited
1
Metal Proving Services Limited … … … …
NRPL Aero Oy
… … … … … … 10
Goodwin Submersible Pumps Africa Pty. Limited … 15
1
Duvelco Limited … … … … … …

1
1
1
3
4
5
6

Refractory Engineering:
1
Goodwin Refractory Services Limited … … …
1
Dupré Minerals Limited … … … … …
2
Hoben International Limited … … … …
Goodwin Refractory Services India Private Limited…
4
Siam Casting Powders Limited … … … … 11
Ultratec Jewelry Supplies Limited … … … 12
SRS (Qingdao) Casting Materials Company Limited
13
Jewelry Plaster Limited … … … … … 14

100 
England and Wales Ordinary
100 
England and Wales Ordinary
77 
England and Wales Ordinary
95 
Ordinary
South Korea
100 
Ordinary
India
100 
Ordinary
China
Ordinary                     100 
Germany

Brazil
Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary
Australia
Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary
Ordinary
Finland
South Africa
Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary

England and Wales Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary
Ordinary
India
Ordinary
Thailand
Ordinary
China
Ordinary
China
Ordinary
Thailand

100 
100 
100 
100 
77 
100 
100 

100 
100 
100 
100 
58 
75.5 
75.5 
75 

*The registered address for each company can be found in note 34. 
All of the above companies are included as part of the consolidated accounts.  All the companies are involved in  
mechanical or refractory engineering, with the exception of Internet Central Limited, which is an internet service 
provider.

Non-controlling interests (NCI) 
The following subsidiaries each have non-controlling interests:  

Company name

Registered Country of
address*

Incorporation

Class of
shares held

% held 

Mechanical Engineering:
Easat Radar Systems Limited … … … …         1
Goodwin Korea Company Limited … … …         3
… … … … … …       10
NRPL Aero Oy

Refractory Engineering:
Jewelry Plaster Limited … … … … …       14
Jewelry Wax Limited
… … … … …       14
Siam Casting Powders Limited … … … …       11
GRS Silicone Company Limited … … … …       17
SRS (Qingdao) Casting Materials Company Limited         13
Shenzhen King-Top Modern Hi-Tech Company Limited    16
Ultratec Jewelry Supplies Limited … … …       12
… … … … …         1
Ying Tai (UK) Limited

England and Wales Ordinary
Ordinary
South Korea
Ordinary
Finland

Ordinary
Thailand
Ordinary
Thailand
Ordinary
Thailand
Ordinary
China
Ordinary
China
Ordinary
China
China
Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary

23 
5 
23 

25 
25 
42 
24.5 
24.5 
24.5 
24.5 
24.5 

*The registered address for each company can be found in note 34. 

During the previous year, the Group acquired the non-controlling interests in Internet Central Limited for £430,000.  
For further details, please refer to the Statement of Changes in Equity on page 51.

72

 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

13. Investments in subsidiaries (continued) 

Non-controlling interests (NCI) (continued) 

The Board considers a material company to be one that has either 10% of the EBITDA or 10% of the net assets of  
the  Group.    As  such,  the  Board  does  not  consider  any  of  its  subsidiary  companies,  which  have  non-controlling   
interests,  to  be  material.    The  financial  information  on  all  subsidiaries  with  non-controlling  interests  has  been   
aggregated, analysing the data by segment, as the entities in each segment have similar characteristics and risk  
profiles, to provide additional information on these companies. 

Non-controlling interests (NCI) – movements in reserves by segment

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Mechanical
Engineering
£’000

Refractory
Engineering
£’000

Total
£’000

Mechanical
Engineering
£’000

Refractory
Engineering
£’000

Total 
£’000 

Profit / (loss) allocated 
to non-controlling 
interests … … …

Dividends paid to 
non-controlling 
interests … … …

Accumulated reserves 
held by non-controlling 
interests … … …

(264)

873

609

(463)

1,103

640 

-

(556)

(556)

-

(808)

(808) 

(927)

5,337

4,410

(690)

5,123

4,433

The  summarised  financial  information  below  represents  the  amounts  in  the  financial  statements  of  the   
subsidiaries, before any intercompany eliminations, and does not reflect the Group’s share of those amounts.

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Mechanical
Engineering
£’000

Refractory
Engineering
£’000

Mechanical
Engineering
£’000

Refractory
Engineering
£’000

Total
£’000

13,273

25,908

11,148

16,882

(6,587)

(19,606)

(110)

(1,214)

Total 
£’000 
15,391 

23,088 

11,955

16,264

(6,822)

(18,473) 

(305)

(744) 

3,436

6,824

(11,651)

(439)

2,125

9,026

(13,019)

(1,104)

Non-current assets …

Current assets … …

Current liabilities …

Non-current liabilities

Total net assets of 
companies with 
non-controlling interests

Revenue of companies 
with non-controlling 
interests … … …

Profit / (loss) for the 
year of companies with 
non-controlling interests

Total comprehensive 
income of companies with 
non-controlling interests

Net cash flow from 
operating activities …

Net cash flow from 
investing activities …

Net cash flow from 
financing activities …

(2,972)

21,333

18,361

(1,830)

21,092

19,262 

19,692

24,814

44,506

7,655

23,455

31,110 

(1,191)

3,481

2,290

(2,013)

4,356

2,343 

(1,240)

3,922

2,682

(1,571)

3,544

1,973 

(212)

2,357

2,145

(324)

3,072

2,748 

(8)

(23)

(255)

(263)

-

(181)

(181) 

(3,059)

(3,082)

(32)

(3,307)

(3,339)

73

 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

14. Investment in associate

The Group’s share of profit after tax in its immaterial associate for the year ended 30th April, 2023 was £65,000 
(2022: £63,000).  
Summary financial information of the Group’s share of its associate company is as follows:

Balance at 1st May
… … … … … … … … … …
Profit before tax … … … … … … … … … … …
Tax … … … … … … … … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … … … … … … … …

Balance at 30th April… … … … … … … … … …

Assets 
… … … … … … … … … … … …
Liabilities … … … … … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000
896
79
(14)
3

964

974
(10)

964

2022 
£’000 
829 
75 
(12) 
4 

896 

914 
(18) 

896

15. Intangible assets 

Cost

      Balance at 1st May, 2021
      Additions … … …
      Disposals … … …
      Exchange adjustment …

Brand 
names 

intellectual
property
£’000

and Manufact-
uring
rights
£’000

Software
and
Licences
£’000

Develop- 
ment 
costs
£’000

Total 
£’000 

9,645
159
-
(142)

5,493
-
(594)
-

1,391
123
(3)
(11)

9,821
1,505
-
-

36,568 
1,787 
(597) 
(361) 

Goodwill
£’000

10,218
-
-
(208)

     Balance at 30th April, 2022

10,010

9,662

4,899

1,500

11,326 37,397 

Amortisation and impairment

      Balance at 1st May, 2021
      Amortisation for the year
      Impairment
… …
      Disposals … … …
      Exchange adjustment …

339
-
-
-
-

6,463
511
-
-
(140)

2,563
324
-
(594)
1

1,046
163
-
(3)
(11)

1,344
559
15
-
-

11,755 
1,557 
15 
(597) 
(150) 

     Balance at 30th April, 2022

339

6,834

2,294

1,195

1,918 12,580 

Net book value

      At 1st May, 2021 … …

      At 30th April, 2022

…

Cost

      Balance at 1st May, 2022
      Additions … … …
      Disposals … … …
      Exchange adjustment …

9,879

9,671

10,010
-
-
61

3,182

2,828

9,662
525
-
3

2,930

2,605

4,899
56
-
-

345

305

8,477

24,813 

9,408

24,817 

1,500
47
(121)
18

11,326
1,196
-
-

37,397 
1,824 
(121) 
82 

     Balance at 30th April, 2023

10,071

10,190

4,955

1,444

12,522 39,183 

Amortisation and impairment

      Balance at 1st May, 2022
      Amortisation for the year
      Disposals … … …
      Exchange adjustment

     Balance at 30th April, 2023

Net book value

339
-
-
-

339

6,834
280
-
-

2,294
316
-
-

1,195
139
(120)
17

1,918
522
-
-

12,580 
1,257 
(120) 
17 

7,114

2,610

1,231

2,440 13,734 

At 30th April, 2023

…

9,732

3,076

2,345

213

10,082 25,448

74

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Mechanical Engineering 
Duevelco
Noreva
Easat Group
Other

12,156
4,172
395
-

Refractory Engineering 
Goodwin Refractory 
Services Holdings Ltd 3,993
Perlite and 
vermiculite
Castaldo
Other

828
217
-

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

15. Intangible assets (continued) 

Customer  lists  are  included  within  brand  names  and  intellectual  property  or  within  manufacturing  rights,   
depending  on  the  nature  of  the  acquisition;  non-compete  agreements  are  disclosed  within  manufacturing   
rights.  During the year, the Group added to its portfolio of intangible assets. 
Amortisation and impairment charges are reported in cost of sales in the statement of profit or loss. 

Impairment testing for cash-generating units containing intangible assets 
The Group tests intangible assets annually for impairment or more frequently if there are indications that an  
intangible asset might be impaired.  For the purpose of impairment testing, an intangible asset is allocated  
to the relevant subsidiary (cash generating unit (“CGU”), which is the lowest level within the Group at which  
the intangible asset is monitored for internal management purposes.

2023

2022 

Property
plant and

equipment  Goodwill
£’000

£’000

Other
  intangible
assets
  (excluding
software)
£’000

Property
plant and

Total
£’000

equipment Goodwill
£’000

£’000

Other 
  intangible
assets
  (excluding
software)
£’000

-
4,623
1,228
-

1,837 13,993
8,795
4,673
3,102

-
3,050
3,102

3,180
3,669
474
-

-
4,575
1,215
-

1,401
-
3,254
3,285

Total 
£’000 

4,581 
8,244 
4,943 
3,285 

3,346

23

7,362

4,340

3,346

-

7,686 

-
-
535

1,801
1,739
3,951

2,629
1,956
4,486

946
298

-
-
535

2,034
1,841
3,027

2,980 
2,139 
3,561 

Total

21,761

9,732

15,503 46,996

12,907

9,671

14,842

37,419

An impairment test is a comparison of the carrying value of the assets of a CGU to their recoverable amount, 
based on a value-in-use calculation. The recoverable amount is the greater of value-in-use and fair value less 
costs  of  disposal.    Where  the  recoverable  amount  is  less  than  the  carrying  value,  an  impairment  results.   
During the year, each CGU containing an intangible asset was separately assessed and tested for impairment.  
As part of testing intangible assets for impairment detailed forecasts of operating cash flows for the next five 
years are used, which are based on budgets and plans approved by the Board. The forecasts represent the  
best  estimate  of  future  performance  of  the  CGU  based  on  past  performance  and  expectations  for  the   
market development of the CGU. 
A number of key assumptions are used as part of impairment testing.  These key assumptions, such as the  
CGU’s position within its relevant market; its ability to generate profitable orders within that market; expected 
growth  rates  both  in  the  market  and  geographically,  are  made  by  management  who  also  take  into  account   
past experience and knowledge of forecast future performance together with other relevant external sources  
of information. 
The projections use various growth rates, such as increases in revenue and / or increases in gross margin, 
whichever  is  relevant  to  that  CGU,  consistent  with  the  profit  forecasts  of  the  CGU  for  the  next  five  years.     
The growth rates are identified by experienced managers within that CGU, who have significant experience  
and knowledge of that CGU and its market place.  In the current and previous financial year, a zero growth  
rate has been assumed for any terminal values.  The forecasts are then discounted at an appropriate pre-tax 
weighted average cost of capital rate considering the perceived levels of risk for that CGU.  Further sensitivity 
tests  are  then  performed  reducing  the  discounted  cash  flows  by  10%,  which  the  Group  sees  as  being  an   
appropriate  reduction  due  to  the  prudent  forecasts  that  it  has  already  used  within  the  testing,  and  also   
increasing the discount rate by a range of up to 10% to confirm there is no need to consider further a need  
for impairment.

75

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

15. Intangible assets (continued) 

Impairment testing for cash-generating units containing intangible assets (continued)

The table below shows the range of rates used in the impairment testing.

Mechanical Engineering
Growth rates
… … … … … … … … … … …
Pre-tax weighted average cost of capital … … … … … … …

Refractory Engineering
Growth rates
… … … … … … … … … … …
Pre-tax weighted average cost of capital … … … … … … …

2023
£’000

0-8%
11-13%

2022 
£’000 

0-15% 
12-15% 

0-6%
12%

0-4% 
12-13% 

Strategic  investments  in  new  and  high  growth  CGUs  are  excluded  from  the  growth  rates  above  as  the   
percentage  growth  from  nil  is  not  meaningful.    This  predominantly  relates  to  one  CGU  with  an  investment   
of  £14  million,  for  new  products  where  the  Group  is  forecasting  the  revenues  to  increase  significantly.     
The  growth  being  forecasted  for  this  CGU  is  significantly  higher  than  the  other  more  established  CGUs,   
whereby  including  them  in  the  table  would  distort  the  growth  forecast  reported  for  the  established  CGUs.     
This  growth  expectation  is  described  as  a  key  judgement  in  note  2.    We  have  reviewed  the  forecasted   
revenues  of  these  sensitive  CGUs  and  then  stressed  the  revenues  by  reducing  them  to  less  than  50%  of   
the  expected  forecasted  revenues  and  can  confirm  that  at  these  dramatically  reduced  revenue  levels  none   
of the three intangible assets would need to be impaired. 
The  estimates  and  assumptions  made  in  connection  with  the  impairment  testing  could  differ  from  future   
actual results of operations and cash flows.  A reasonably likely variation in the assumptions, as disclosed,  
would  not  give  rise  to  an  impairment.    However,  future  events  could  cause  the  Group  to  conclude  that   
impairment indicators exist and that the asset values associated with a given operation have become impaired. 
Duvelco 
The Company has invested circa £14 million in the area of high performance polymer resins.  The Company will 
commence  a  period  of  testing  and  commissioning  of  the  plant  in  Q2  and  Q3  of  financial  year  2024  before   
any commercial activity takes place.  The judgement of the Board is that the market potential here is significant 
and that future profitability is expected to be strong. Accordingly, the Directors’ do not see a need to impair  
our investment in this area.

16. Long-term derivative assets

Notes
Interest rate swap… … … … … … … … … … 28 (d)
Derivative assets designated as cash flow hedging instruments … … 28 (d)

17. Inventories

Net balances 
Raw materials and consumables … … … … … … … …
Work in progress … … … … … … … … … … …
Finished goods … … … … … … … … … … …

Provisions held 
Raw materials and consumables … … … … … … … …
Work in progress … … … … … … … … … … …
Finished goods … … … … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000
4,802
1,130

5,932

2023
£’000

23,101
13,001
11,853

47,955

(814)
(1,283)
(495)

(2,592)

2022 
£’000 
2,466 
275 

2,741

2022 
£’000 

19,828 
10,161 
10,375 

40,364 

(438) 
(1,513) 
(482) 

(2,433) 

Inventory impaired during the year … … … … … … … …

(1,099)

(1,390) 

Release of inventory impairment … … … … … … … …

885

- 

The prior year comparative for the provision against work in progress has been amended.

76

 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

18. Trade and other receivables

Balances due within one year

Trade receivables … … … … … … … … … …
Other financial assets … … … … … … … … …
Advance payments to suppliers
… … … … … … …
Prepayments and other non-financial assets … … … … …
… … … … … … …
Deferred tax asset (see note 26)

Balances due after more than one year

Trade receivables … … … … … … … … … …

Financial assets  … … … … … … … … … …
Non-financial assets … … … … … … … … …

19. Derivative financial assets

…
…
…
…
…

…

…
…

Notes

Interest rate swap… … … … … … … … … … 28 (d)
Derivative assets designated as cash flow hedging instruments … … 28 (d)
Derivative assets not designated in a cash flow relationship … … … 28 (d)

2023
£’000
28,094
1,663
857
3,918
57

34,589

-

29,757
4,832

34,589

2023
£’000

1,127
1,429
128

2,684

The analysis between hedged and unhedged derivative assets in the previous year has been amended.

20. Cash and cash equivalents

Cash in hand
… …  … … … … … … … … …
Bank balances … …  … … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000

99
19,562

19,661

2022 
£’000 
22,529
1,188 
1,235 
3,635 
60 

28,647

1,191 

24,908 
4,930 

29,838 

2022 
£’000 

274 
572 
365 

1,211 

2022 
£’000 

73 
11,578 

11,651

21. Borrowings

Information  is  provided  below  about  the  contractual  terms  of  the  Group’s  lease  liabilities,  bank  loans  and   
borrowings.    The  bank  loans  repayable  by  instalment  are  secured  against  a  property  in  Germany  together   
with  furnaces  and  land  in  the  UK  (refer  to  note  11).    For  more  information  about  the  Group’s  exposure  to   
interest rate and foreign currency risk, see note 28.

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Non-current
liabilities
£’000

Current
liabilities
£’000

Total
liabilities
£’000

Non-current
liabilities
£’000

Current
liabilities
£’000

Total 
liabilities 
£’000 

Bank overdrafts… …

-

119

119

-

-

- 

6,985

1,154

8,139

8,059

1,005

9,064 

Bank loans - repayable 
by instalments … …

Bank loans - rolling  
credit facilities … …

Other loans … …

Lease liabilities… …

4,271

47,256

36,000

3,500

39,500

-

28,000

-

4,317

40,376

-

202

1,557

2,764

28,000 

202 

5,874 

43,140

-

1,956

6,729

-

6,227

53,985

77

 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

21. Borrowings (continued)

Reconciliation of liabilities arising from financing activities 

Bank

overdrafts Bank loans - Bank loans -
used for cash repayable by rolling credit
instalments
management
£’000
£’000

£’000

facilities Other loans
£’000

5,299

-

3,817

(52)

26,000

-

2,000

-

-

-

202

-

Lease 
liabilities
£’000

3,374

3,630

(1,153)

Total
£’000 

34,673 

3,630 

4,866 

23

(29) 

9,064

28,000

202

5,874

43,140 

9,064

28,000

202

-

-

-

-

-

-

(979)

11,500

(202)

(1,874)

5,874

2,242

43,140 

2,242 

-

119 

8,445 

Opening balance at 
1st May, 2021 … …

Non-cash movements

Cash flows

… …

Foreign exchange   
movement

… …

Closing balance 
30th April, 2022

Opening balance at 
1st May, 2022 … …

Non-cash movements

Change in bank  
overdrafts

… …

Cash flows

… …

Foreign exchange   
movement

… …

Closing balance 
30th April, 2023

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

119

-

-

54

-

119

8,139

39,500

-

-

(15)

39 

6,227

53,985

During  the  current  year  and  previous  year,  additional  leases  have  been  taken  out  to  fund  ongoing  Green   
Projects.

Contractual undiscounted cash flows 

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Minimum
loan
payments
£’000

Interest
£’000

Principal
£’000

Bank loans - repayable 
by instalments

Less than one year …

1,514

Between two and 
three years

… …

Between four and 
five years

… …

More than five years …

2,739

1,449

5,347

11,049

Lease liabilities

Less than one year …

2,231

Between two and 
three years

… …

Between four and 
five years

… …

More than five years …

3,160

1,182

268

6,841

1,154

2,140

986

3,859

8,139

1,956

2,871

1,138

262

6,227

360

599

463

1,488

2,910

275

289

44

6

614

78

Interest
£’000

Principal 
£’000 

Minimum
loan
payments
£’000

1,234

2,441

1,993

4,985

229

368

247

745

10,653

1,589

1,684

2,674

1,463

362

6,183

127

133

37

12

309

1,005 

2,073 

1,746 

4,240 

9,064 

1,557 

2,541 

1,426 

350 

5,874

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

22. Trade and other liabilities

Trade payables … … … … … … … … … … …
Other financial liabilities… … … … … … … … … …
Other taxation and social security … … … … … … … …
Accrued expenses… … … … … … … … … … …
Advance payments from customers … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000
… 22,400
988
…
1,776
…
6,062
…
539
…

2022 
£’000 

18,958 
1,929 
2,117 
4,001 
255 

31,765

27,260 

Financial liabilities… … … … … … … … … … …
Non-financial liabilities … … … … … … … … … …

… 25,164
6,601
…

23,004 
4,256 

31,765

27,260

23. Derivative financial liabilities

2023
Notes £’000
Derivative liabilities designated as cash flow hedging instruments … … … 28 (d) 1,773
610
Derivative liabilities not designated in a cash flow relationship … … … 28 (d)

24. Provisions

Balance at 1st May … … … … … … … … … …
Increase in provision … … … … … … … … … …
Release of provision … … … … … … … … … …
Provision utilised … … … … … … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … … … … … … … …

Balance at 30th April… … … … … … … … … …

Warranty due within one year … … … … … … … … …
Warranty due after one year … … … … … … … … …

Balance at 30th April… … … … … … … … … …

2,383

2023
£’000

456
249
(216)
-
23

512

266
246

512

…
…
…
…
…

…

…
…

…

Provisions include warranties for products sold which generally cover a period of between 1 and 3 years. 

25. Long-term derivative liabilities

Derivative liabilities designated as cash flow hedging instruments … … … 28 (d)

2023
Notes £’000
-

-

2022 
£’000 

2,144 
249 

2,393

2022 
£’000 
859 
167 
(408) 
(144) 
(18) 

456 

205 
251 

456 

2022 
£’000 

1,643 

1,643

79

 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

26. Deferred tax assets and liabilities 

Deferred tax balances are attributable to the following:

Property, plant 
and equipment … …

Intangible assets

…

Derivative financial 
instruments … …

Tax losses

… …

Other temporary 
differences

… …

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Assets
£’000

Liabilities
£’000

Net
£’000

Assets
£’000

Liabilities
£’000

67

-

65

350

684

(10,159)

(10,092)

(2,021)

(2,021)

(144)

-

(148)

(79)

350

536

63

-

714

2,496

430

(8,344)

(2,186)

(702)

-

(122)

Net 
£’000 

(8,281) 

(2,186) 

12 

2,496 

308 

1,166

(12,472)

(11,306)

3,703

(11,354)

(7,651) 

Deferred tax balances are reported in the balance sheet as follows:

Deferred tax asset (see note 18)
… … … … … … …
Deferred tax liability … … … … … … … … …

…
…

2023
£’000
57
(11,363)

(11,306)

2022 
£’000 
60 
(7,711) 

(7,651)

Property,
plant and
equipment
£’000

Intangible
 assets
£’000

Balance at 
1st May, 2021

Recognised in  
profit and loss

Recognised in  
equity

Exchange 
adjustment

(4,382)

(1,686)

(3,891)

(477)

-

(8)

-

(23)

Balance at 
30th April, 2022

(8,281)

(2,186)

Balance at 
1st May, 2022

Recognised in  
profit and loss

Recognised in  
equity

Exchange 
adjustment

Balance at 
30th April, 2023

(8,281)

(2,186)

(1,832)

165

-

21

-

-

Derivative

Share- 
based
financial payments
reserve
£’000

instruments
£’000

Tax

Other 
temporary 
losses differences
£’000
£’000

Total 
£’000 

(436)

(666)

1,114

12

12

828

(919)

-

915

-

144

(5,445) 

(915)

2,496

145

(3,308) 

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

19

1,114 

(12) 

2,496

308

(7,651) 

2,496

308

(7,651) 

(2,146)

238

(2,747) 

-

-

-

(919) 

(10)

11 

(10,092)

(2,021)

(79)

350

536 (11,306)

When share options are exercised, the Group claims a corporation tax deduction based on the notional cost  
to the Group.  To avoid distorting the tax charge in the statement of profit or loss, the release of the deferred  
tax  balance  for  the  share  based  payment  reserve  was  reported  within  the  statement  of  profit  or  loss  in  the   
previous year.

80

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

26. Deferred tax assets and liabilities (continued)

Deferred tax assets not recognised on losses 

Gross tax losses … … … … … … … … … …
Deferred tax assets not recognised … … … … … … …

…
…

2023
£’000
2,348
521

2022 
£’000 
2,364 
500 

The Group has not recognised a deferred tax asset against taxable losses incurred by some of its subsidiaries.  
Typically these are subsidiaries, which are still in their formative years and, whilst profitability and the assoicated 
recoverability of tax losses is expected in the long-term, it is deemed prudent to not recognise a deferred tax  
asset at this stage, as a result of the incertainty

27. Capital and reserves 

Share capital

Authorised, allotted, called up and fully paid:
7,689,600 (2022: 7,526,400) ordinary shares of 10p each
… … … …
Issue of 163,200 ordinary shares of 10p each … … … … … …

2023                2022 
£’000               £’000 

769
-

769

753 
16 

769 

The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends as declared from time to time and are entitled 
to one vote per share at meetings of the Company.

Translation reserve 
The translation reserve comprises all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial 
statements of foreign operations. 

Share-based payments reserve 
The share-based payments reserve is a non cash-impacting provision, as required by IFRS 2, relating to the 
Equity Long Term Incentive Plan, which vested at 1st May, 2019. Further details are included in note 35.

Cash flow hedge reserve and cost of hedging reserve 
The hedging reserve comprises the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow 
hedge instruments related to hedged transactions that have not yet occurred.  The cost of hedging reserve  
relates to the associated costs attaching to the cash flow hedge reserve, such as counterparty risk and forward 
point adjustments. 

Deferred tax

Aggregate deferred tax balances recognised in equity:
Derivative financial instruments

… … … … … … … …

Asset / (liability) 
2023                2022 
£’000               £’000 

(196)

723

28. Financial risk management 

The Group’s operations expose it to a variety of financial risks that include the effects of changes in market  
prices (interest rates, foreign exchange rates and commodity prices), credit risk and liquidity.  The Group has  
in place risk management policies that seek to limit the adverse effects on the financial performance of the  
Group by using various instruments and techniques. 
Risk management policies have been set by the Board and applied by the Group. 

a) Credit risk 

The Group’s financial assets are cash and cash equivalents; trade and other receivables; contract assets; 
derivative financial assets; the carrying amounts of which represent the Group’s maximum exposure to  
credit risk in relation to financial assets. 
The  credit  risk  on  liquid  funds  is  limited  because  the  counterparties  are  banks  with  high  credit  ratings   
assigned by international credit rating agencies. 
The  Group’s  credit  risk  is  primarily  attributable  to  its  trade  receivables  and  is  managed  through  the   
following processes: 
i) The majority of orders accepted by Group companies are backed by credit insurance. 
ii) Some orders are accepted with no credit insurance but with letters of credit. 
iii) Some orders are accepted with no credit insurance and no letter of credit but with an internal analysis  

of the customer’s size, creditworthiness, historic profitability and payment record. 

iv) A few orders (less than 10%), with a material value, are taken at risk following review by at least two  

Board members. 

v) Major orders are normally accompanied by stage payments which go towards mitigating our credit risk.

81

 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

28. Financial risk management (continued) 

a)   Credit risk (continued) 

Whilst  the  theoretical  credit  risk  would  be  the  actual  balances  themselves  as  reported  within  the  table   
below, this assumes that the credit insurance company is also a credit risk for the invoiced trade debtors  
and  contract  assets  underwritten  by  them.    Our  insurer  enjoys  a  strong  credit  rating  with  the  likes  of   
Moody’s,  S&P  and  Fitch.    As  a  result,  and  after  having  looked  back  on  the  Group’s  track  record  of   
negligible  impairment  losses  on  these  type  of  assets  over  the  last  10  years,  the  Directors  are  of  the   
opinion  that  there  is  no  cost  /  benefit  in  performing  an  ECL  type  loss  analysis  and  so  impairment   
provisions are based on known issues rather than a statistical estimate.

Exposure to credit risk 
The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure.  The maximum exposure 
to credit risk at the reporting date was: 

Carrying amount 

Contract assets … … … … … … … …
Trade and other financial assets – due within one year … …
Trade and other financial assets – due after more than one year
Cash at bank and cash equivalents … … … … …
Derivative financial assets – due after more than one year …
Derivative financial assets – due within one year … … …

Notes

4
18
18
20
16
19

2023
£’000
16,257
29,757
-
19,661
5,932
2,684

2022 
£’000 
12,331 
23,717 
1,191 
11,651 
2,741 
1,211

At the reporting date, the maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables, before taking into account  
credit insurance, by geographic region was: 

Carrying amount 

UK … … … … … … … … … … … …
Rest of Europe … … … … … … … … … …
USA … … … … … … … … … … … …
Pacific Basin
… … … … … … … … … …
Rest of World … … … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000
7,663
4,799
3,267
6,315
6,050

2022 
£’000 
3,603 
4,053 
1,506 
5,080 
9,478 

28,094

23,720

The ageing of trade receivables and impairments at the reporting date was: 

Net
£’000
Not past due … … … 18,666
4,940
Past due 1-30 days … …
2,409
Past due 31-90 days… …
2,079
Past due more than 90 days

2023

Gross
£’000
18,666
4,942
2,440
2,288

Impairment
provision
£’000

(2)
(31)
(209)

2022 

Gross
£’000
13,979
4,962
2,613
2,866

Impairment 
provision 
£’000 
(46) 
(82) 
(283) 
(289) 

Net
£’000
13,933
4,880
2,330
2,577

28,094

28,336

(242)

23,720

24,420

(700) 

Management believes that there are no significant credit risks remaining with the above net receivables and 
that the credit quality of customers is good, based on a review of past payment history and the current  
financial status of the customers.  Included in trade receivables are retentions which are job specific and  
have varying due dates depending on the complexity of the job.  These are included in the not past due  
category.  The  Group  has  not  renegotiated  the  terms  of  any  trade  receivables  and  has  not  pledged  any   
trade receivables as security.  
The Directors estimate that the fair value of the Group’s trade and other receivables is approximate to their 
carrying values.  

An analysis of the provision for impairment of receivables is as follows:

Opening balance at 1st May … … … … … … … …
Increase in provision … … … … … … … … …
Release of provision … … … … … … … … …
Provision utilised during the year … … … … … … …
Exchange adjustment … … … … … … … … …

Closing balance at 30th April … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000
700
74
(362)
(164)
(6)

242

2022 
£’000 
548 
470 
(342) 
- 
24 

700

82

 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

28. Financial risk management (continued)

b) Liquidity risk 

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due.  
The Group’s approach to managing liquidity is to ensure, as far as possible, that it will always have sufficient 
liquidity to meet its liabilities when due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring  
unacceptable losses or risking damage to the Group’s reputation. 
At the year end the Group had the following unutilised bank facilities in respect of which all conditions  
precedent had been met: 

Uncommitted
£’000

2023
Committed
£’000

Total
£’000

Uncommitted
£’000

Committed
£’000

Total 
£’000 

2022 

Unutilised bank 
facilities

6,050

33,500

39,550

6,050

16,500

22,550 

The  Group’s  principal  borrowing  facilities  are  provided  by  three  banks  in  the  form  of  borrowings  and   
short-term  overdraft  facilities.    The  quantum  of  borrowing  facilities  available  to  the  Group  is  reviewed   
regularly  in  light  of  current  working  capital  requirements  and  the  need  for  capital  investment  for  the   
long-term future for the Group.

Maturity analysis 
The table below analyses the Group’s financial non-derivative liabilities into maturity groupings based on 
the  period  outstanding  at  the  balance  sheet  date  up  to  the  contractual  maturity  date.    All  figures  are   
contracted gross cash flows that have not been discounted. 

Contractual cash flows

Within
1 year 2-3 years 4-5 years 5+ years
£’000
£’000

£’000

£’000

Carrying 
value 
Total 
£’000 

Total
£’000

… … …

Non-derivative financial liabilities
Bank loans - repayable 
by instalments
Bank loans - rolling 
credit facilities
… … …
Other loans … … … …
Lease liabilities
… … …
Trade and other 
financial liabilities … … …

1,234

-
202
1,684

2,441

1,993

4,985

10,653

9,064

9,000
-
2,673

19,000
-
1,464

-
-
362

28,000
202
6,183

28,000 
202 
5,874 

23,004

-

-

-

23,004

23,004 

At 30th April, 2022 … …

26,124

14,114

22,457

5,347

68,042

66,144 

… … …

Bank loans - repayable 
by instalments
Bank loans - rolling 
credit facilities
Lease liabilities
Trade and other 
financial liabilities … … …

… … …
… … …

1,514

3,500
2,231

2,739

1,449

5,347

11,049

8,139 

27,000
3,160

9,000
1,182

-
268

39,500
6,841

39,500 
6,227 

25,164

-

-

-

25,164

25,164 

At 30th April, 2023 … …

32,409

32,899

11,631

5,615

82,554

79,030

The interest rates chargeable on these loans are on a floating basis against SONIA and UK base rate, with 
bank margins of less than 2.1%.  With effect from 1st September, 2021, the Group entered into a ten year 
derivative with HSBC to fix its variable interest rate at less than 1% against a notional £30 million of debt.  
There is one bank loan of £1.3 million repayable by instalments, with the final payment due in the year  
ended 30th April, 2039.  Interest is charged at an effective interest rate of 1.96% (2022: 1.96%), which is  
fixed for the whole period. 
A second bank loan of £4.5 million is repayable by instalments, with the final payment due in the year  
ended 30th April, 2042.   The effective interest rate is 6.21% (2022: 2.55%), which will vary over the loan  
period.

83

       
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

28. Financial risk management (continued)

c) Market risk 

Foreign exchange risk 
The Group is subject to fluctuations in exchange rates on its net investments overseas and transactional 
monetary assets and liabilities not denominated in the operating (or “functional”) currency of the operating 
unit involved. 
The Group is exposed to fluctuations in several currencies which give rise to the net currency gains and 
losses recognised in the statement of profit or loss. 
The  Group  at  its  discretion  is  empowered  to  hedge  its  estimated  annual  foreign  currency  exposure  in   
respect of forecast sales and purchases if the Board deems it appropriate after having taken into account  
the expected movement in the foreign exchange rates.  The Group uses forward exchange contracts to  
hedge its foreign currency risk.  The foreign exchange contracts have maturities within three years after  
the balance sheet date. Where necessary, the forward exchange contracts are rolled over at maturity. 
In  respect  of  other  monetary  assets  and  liabilities  held  in  currencies,  the  Group  ensures  that  the  net   
exposure  is  eliminated  through  the  use  of  forward  exchange  contracts  or  spot  transactions  at  the  time   
the contractual commitment is in place.

Currency profile of financial assets and liabilities: 

The table below does not include the exposure from hedging positions. The foreign currency balances have 
been translated into Sterling using the reporting date spot rates below. 

2023

US
Dollar
£’000

 Euro
£’000

Other
£’000

Total
£’000

US 
Dollar
£’000

2022 

 Euro
£’000

Other
£’000

7,615

2,807

77

10,499

6,193

2,242

1,195

3,508

350

5,053

1,388

14

51

74

Total 
£’000 

8,486 

1,476 

(823)

(808)

(72)

(1,703)

(1,121)

(965)

(24)

(2,110) 

7,987

5,507

355

13,849

6,460

1,291

101

7,852

Trade and other 
receivables
Cash and cash  
equivalents
Trade and other 

payables

The following significant exchange rates applied during the year, for reporting purposes; 

US Dollar … … … … …
Euro … … … … … …

2023

2022 

Average
exchange rate
1.2016
1.1520

Reporting
date spot rate
1.2566
1.1390

Average
exchange rate
1.3591
1.1791

Reporting 
spot rate 
1.2570 
1.1920

84

 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

28. Financial risk management (continued)

c) Market risk (continued)

Interest rate risk 
The Group is subject to fluctuations in interest rates on its borrowings and surplus cash.  The Group is  
aware of the financial products available to hedge against adverse movements in interest rates.  Formal  
reviews are undertaken to determine whether such instruments are appropriate for the Group.  As reported 
elsewhere in these financial statements, the Company on 2nd July, 2021 signed a contract to mitigate the 
impact  of  interest  rate  risk  by  taking  out  an  interest  rate  swap  derivative  fixing  £30  million  of  notional   
debt  at  less  than  1%  versus  the  variable  inter-bank  lending  rate  (SONIA)  for  a  period  of  ten  years,   
commencing 1st September, 2021. 
The table below shows the Group’s financial assets and liabilities split by those bearing fixed and floating 
rates and those that are non interest-bearing. 

2023

Non-
Fixed Floating interest-
rate bearing
£’000

rate
£’000

£’000

Total
£’000

Fixed
rate
£’000

Floating
rate
£’000

2022 

Non-
interest- 
bearing
£’000

Total 
£’000 

Cash and cash 
equivalents
Contract assets
Trade and financial 

assets

Derivative assets
Contract liabilities*
Trade and other 

financial liabilities 

Derivative liabilities
Bank overdrafts
Bank loans - 

-
-

-
-
-

-
-
-

19,661
-

-
16,257

19,661
16,257

-
-
-

29,757
8,616
(32,747)

29,757
8,616
(32,747)

-
-
(119)

(25,164)
(2,383)
-

(25,164)
(2,383)
(119)

-
-

-
-
-

-
-
-

11,651
-

-
12,331

11,651 
12,331 

-
-
-

-
-
-

24,908
3,952
(14,749)

(23,004)
(4,036)
-

repayable by 
instalments

Bank loans - 

rolling credit 
facilities
Other loans
Lease liabilities

(3,920)

(4,219)

-
-
(1,880)

(39,500)
-
(4,347)

-

-
-

(8,139)

(4,564)

(4,500)

(39,500)
-

(6,227)

-
(202)
(2,280)

(28,000)
-
(3,594)

-

-
-
-

24,908 
3,952 
(14,749) 

(23,004) 
(4,036) 
- 

(9,064) 

(28,000) 
(202) 
(5,874) 

(5,800)

(28,524)

(5,664)

(39,988)

(7,046)

(24,443)

(598)

(32,087) 

*The majority of contract liabilities are advance payments from customers.

85

 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

28. Financial risk management (continued)

d)  Capital management 

The Group’s main objective when managing capital is to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going 
concern in order to provide returns to shareholders.  The Board maintains a strong capital base so as to 
maintain  investor,  creditor  and  market  confidence  and  to  sustain  future  development  of  the  business.   
Operations are funded through various shareholders’ funds, bank debt, leases and, where appropriate,  
deferred consideration on acquisitions.  The capital structure of the Group reflects the judgement of the  
Board  as  to  the  appropriate  balance  of  funding  required.  At  30th  April,  2023,  the  capital  used  was   
£157.6 million, (2022: £145.1 million) as shown in the following table: 

Cash and cash equivalents … … … … … …
Other loans
… … … … … … … …
Total lease liabilities … … … … … … …
Bank overdrafts … … … … … … … …
Bank loans - repayable by instalments … … … …
Bank loans - rolling credit facilities… … … … …

Net debt in accordance with IFRS 16 … … … …
Operating lease debt (former IAS 17 definition)… … …

Relevant net debt for KPI purposes… … … … …
Total equity attributable to equity holders of the parent …

… …
… …
… …
… …
… …
… …

… …
… …

… …
… …

…
…
…
…
…
…

…
…

…
…

Capital

2023
£’000

(19,661)
-
6,227
119
8,139
39,500

2022 
£’000 

(11,651) 
202 
5,874 
- 
9,064 
28,000 

34,324
(1,502)

31,489 
(1,704) 

32,822
124,747

29,785 
115,310 

157,569

145,095

The Group aims to maintain a strong credit rating and headroom whilst optimising return to shareholders 
through an appropriate balance of debt and equity funding. The Group's general strategy is to keep the debt 
to equity ratio below 30%, adjusted where appropriate for the effect of acquisitions. At 30th April, 2023 net 
debt was £32.8 million (2022: £29.8 million). The gearing ratio is 26.3% (2022: 25.8%). 
The Group manages its capital structure and makes adjustments to it with regard to the risks inherent in the 
business and in light of changes to economic conditions.  
Working  capital  is  managed  in  order  to  generate  maximum  conversion  of  profits  into  cash  and  cash   
equivalents. Dividends are based on current year profits, thereby maintaining equity. 
The policy for debt is to ensure a smooth debt maturity profile with the objective of ensuring continuity of 
funding. The repayment profile for the debt is shown in note 28 (b). 
There were no changes in the Group’s approach to capital management during the year. 

Currency derivatives 
The Group utilises currency derivatives to hedge future transactions and cash flows.  The Group is party to 
a variety of foreign currency forward contracts in the management of its exchange rate exposures.  Foreign 
currency  forward  contracts  are  denominated  in  the  same  currency  as  the  highly  probable  future  sales   
and the hedged ratio is 1:1. 
Forecast transactions 
The Group classifies its forward exchange contracts hedging forecast transactions as cash flow hedges and 
states them at fair value.   
Recognised assets and liabilities 
Changes in the fair value of forward exchange contracts that economically hedge monetary assets and  
liabilities  in  foreign  currencies  and  for  which  no  hedge  accounting  is  applied  are  recognised  in  the   
statement  of  profit  or  loss.    Both  the  changes  in  fair  value  of  the  forward  contracts  and  the  foreign   
exchange gains and losses relating to the monetary items are recognised as part of cost of sales.

Interest rate swaps 
The Group utilises interest rate swap derivatives to hedge against future movements in floating interest  
rates against the Group's floating rate debt.  Hedge accounting is not applied for these instruments and  
all  movements  in  fair  value  are  recognised  in  profit  or  loss.    The  prior  year  analysis  of  the  unhedged   
and hedged assets due within one year has been amended.

86

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

28. Financial risk management (continued) 

d)  Capital management (continued) 

Interest rate swaps (continued)

Expected cash flow

 Within
1 year
£’000

2-3
years
£’000

4-5
years
£’000

5+
years
£’000

  Carrying Nominal 
Value 
£’000 

value
£’000

Total
£’000

Interest rate swap 
Assets

Forward exchange 
contracts 

Not designated 
in cash flow 
relationship 
Assets
Liabilities

Designated 
in cash flow 
relationship 
Assets
Liabilities

Total as at 
30th April, 2022

Interest rate swap 
Assets

Forward exchange 
contracts 

Not designated 
in cash flow 
relationship 
Assets
Liabilities

Designated 
in cash flow 
relationship 
Assets
Liabilities

Total as at 
30th April, 2023

274

858

590

1,018

2,740

2,740

30,000 

365
(249)

116

-
-

-

572
(2,144)

275
(1,643)

(1,572)

(1,368)

-
-

-

-
-

-

-
-

-

-
-

-

365
(249)

116

365
(249)

2,668 
12,132 

116

14,800 

847
(3,787)

847
(3,787)

8,012 
48,475 

(2,940)

(2,940)

56,487 

(1,182)

(510)

590

1,018

(84)

(84)

101,287 

1,127

1,707

1,312

1,783

5,929

5,929

30,000 

128
(610)

(482)

-
-

-

-
-

-

1,429
(1,773)

(344)

997
-

997

133
-

133

-
-

-

-
-

-

128
(610)

128
(610)

8,044 
5,369 

(482)

(482)

13,413 

2,559
(1,773)

2,559 107,031 
35,644 
(1,773)

786

786 142,675 

301

2,704

1,445

1,783

6,233

6,233 186,088

87

 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

28. Financial risk management (continued) 

d)  Capital management (continued)

Cash flow hedging reserve and cost of hedging reserve 

Change in value used to calculated hedge ineffectiveness

… …

Net value of derivatives designated in cash flow relationship … …
… …
Matured derivative contracts … … … … …
… …
Deferred tax balance recognised in equity … … …

Cash flow hedge reserve … … … … … …
Cost of hedging reserve … … … … … …

… …
… …

Non-controlling interests 

Cash flow hedge reserve 
Attributable to equity holders of the parent … … …
… … …
Attributable to non-controlling interests

… …
… …

Cost of hedging reserve 
Attributable to equity holders of the parent … … …
… … …
Attributable to non-controlling interests

… …
… …

…

…
…
…

…
…

…
…

…
…

2022
£’000
… (4,077)

…
…
…

786
(72)
(196)

2021 
£’000 

(3,037) 

(2,940) 
(423) 
723 

518

(2,640) 

… 1,492
(974)
…

(2,788) 
148 

518

(2,640) 

… 1,504
(12)
…

(2,746) 
(42) 

1,492

(2,788) 

…
…

(976)
2

(974)

140 
8 

148 

The matured derivative contracts carried forward as part of the hedge reserve are those where the hedge  
was still effective at maturity but the underlying transactions had not occurred. 

Sensitivity analysis 
The  Group  has  calculated  the  following  sensitivities  based  on  available  data  from  forward  contract   
markets for the principal foreign currencies in which the Group operates.  As foreign exchange rates and  
interest rates continue to fluctuate significantly, the Board considers it most appropriate to provide the  
sensitivities  for  a  1%  change,  because  these  figures  can  be  extrapolated  proportionately  to  obtain  an   
estimate  of  the  impact  of  large  movements.  The  Group’s  exposure  to  foreign  currency  changes  for  all   
other foreign currencies is not considered material. 

                                                         Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

(Profit) / loss
impact on
equity
£’000

(Profit) / loss
impact on
statement of
profit or loss
£’000

(Profit) / loss
impact on
equity
£’000

(Profit) / loss
impact on 
statement of 
profit or loss 
£’000 

1% increase in US Dollar fx rate 
against pound Sterling
1% increase in Euro fx rate 
against pound Sterling

…

…

1% decrease in US Dollar fx rate 
against pound Sterling
1% decrease in Euro fx rate 
against pound Sterling

…

…

1% increase in interest rates …

(428)

(53)

428

53

200

(597)

(37)

597

37

-

(207) 

68 

207 

(68) 

-

…

…

…

…

…

(845)

(67)

845

67

-

88

 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

28. Financial risk management (continued)

e)  Total financial assets and liabilities 

The table below sets out the Group’s accounting classification of each class of financial assets and liabilities 
and their fair values at 30th April, 2023 and 30th April, 2022. 

Financial assets

Year ended 30th April, 2023

Year ended 30th April, 2022 

Carrying 
amount
£’000

Fair value
£’000

Carrying 
amount
£’000

Fair value 
£’000 

At amortised cost
Cash and cash equivalents … … …
Contract assets … … … … …
Trade receivables … … … … …
Other financial assets … … … …

19,661
16,257
28,094
1,663

At fair value through profit and loss
Derivative financial assets not designated in  
a cash flow hedge relationship
Interest rate swap

… …
… … … …

Fair value – hedging instrument
Derivative financial assets designated and  
effective as cash flow hedging instruments

128
5,929

2,559

Total financial assets

… … …

74,291

Financial liabilities at amortised cost

Contract liabilities
… … … …
Trade payables … … … … …
Other financial liabilities
… … …
Lease liabilities … … … … …
Bank overdrafts … … … … …
Bank loans - repayable by instalments …
Bank loans - rolling credit facilities … …
… … … … …
Other loans

32,747
22,400
2,764
6,227
119
8,139
39,500
-

19,661
16,257
28,094
1,663

11,651
12,331
23,720
1,188

11,651 
12,331 
23,720 
1,188 

128
5,929

365
2,740

365 
2,740 

2,559

74,291

32,747
22,400
2,764
6,227
119
8,139
39,500
-

847

52,842

14,749
18,958
4,046
5,874
-
9,064
28,000
202

847 

52,842

14,749 
18,958 
4,046 
5,874 
- 
9,064
28,000
202 

610

610

247

247 

At fair value through the profit and loss
Derivative financial liabilities not designated in  
a cash flow hedge relationship

… …

Fair value – hedging instrument
Derivative financial liabilities designated and  
effective as cash flow hedging instruments

Total financial liabilities … … … 114,279

114,279

1,773

1,773

3,787

84,927

3,787 

84,927 

The analysis between hedged and unhedged derivative assets in the previous year has been amended. 
Derivative financial assets and liabilities fair values in the above table are derived using Level 2 inputs as  
defined by IFRS 7 as detailed in the paragraph below. 
IFRS 7 requires that the classification of financial instruments at fair value be determined by reference to  
the  source  of  inputs  used  to  derive  the  fair  value.  This  classification  uses  the  following  three-level   
hierarchy:    Level  1  -  quoted  prices  (unadjusted)  in  active  markets  for  identical  assets  or  liabilities;   
Level  2  -  inputs  other  than  quoted  prices  included  within  Level  1  that  are  observable  for  the  asset  or   
liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices); Level 3 - inputs for the asset  
or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs). 
The  Group  does  not  use  derivatives  for  speculative  purposes.    All  transactions  in  derivative  financial   
instruments  are  underpinned  by  firm  orders  from  customers  or  to  suppliers  or  where  there  is  a  high   
degree of probability that orders will be received. 
For short-term cash and cash equivalents, trade and other receivables, contract assets, trade and other  
financial liabilities, contract liabilities, fixed and floating rate borrowings, the fair values are the same as  
carrying value.

89

 
 
  
 
  
 
 
 
  
 
  
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

29. Capital commitments 

Contracted capital commitments at 30th April, 2023 for which no provision has been made in these financial 
statements were £4,576,000 (2022: £8,393,000). 

30. Guarantees and contingencies 

The  table  below  sets  out  the  number  and  value  of  unexpired  bank  guarantee  bonds  as  at  30th  April,  2023   
and  30th  April,  2022.    These  guarantee  bonds  are  required  as  part  of  the  terms  and  conditions  within  our   
Mechanical Engineering contracts. 

146 guarantee and bonds contracts (2022: 148) … … … … …

31. Subsequent events 

2023
£’000

9,180

2022 
£’000 

6,586

After  the  balance  sheet  date  an  ordinary  dividend  of  115p  per  qualifying  ordinary  share  was  proposed  by   
the Directors (2022: Ordinary dividend of 107.80p).  
The current year proposed ordinary dividend of £8,636,000 has not been provided for within these financial  
statements (2022: Proposed ordinary dividend of £8,289,000 was not provided for within the comparative  
figures). 
The company announced on 5th May, 2023 that it was proceeding with a Tender offer to tender up to 180,000 of 
its ordinary shares at the tender price of £48 per ordinary share.  The tender offer was subsequently approved 
at a General Meeting that was held on 30th May, 2023 and the following day the offer ended.  The offer was 
oversubscribed by 229% and, of the total number of Ordinary Shares validly tendered, all 180,000 Ordinary 
Shares  have  been  purchased  by  the  Company  and  on  7th  June,  2023  were  cancelled  off  the  register.     
The  total  cost  of  Ordinary  Shares  purchased  was  £8.64  million.  The  resulting  number  of  shares  as  at  the   
signing date is 7,509,600.

32. Non-principal subsidiaries and associates 

Company name

Non-principal Subsidiaries:
Mechanical Engineering: 
Easat Radar Systems India Private Limited
4
Goodwin Submersible Pumps West Africa Limited … 18
Refractory Engineering: 
Gold Star Brazil Limited
… … … … …
8
4
Gold Star Powders Private Limited … … … …
Jewelry Wax Limited … … … … … … 14
GRS Silicone Company Limited … … … … 17
16
Shenzhen King-Top Modern Hi-Tech Company Limited

… …

Non-principal holding companies:
Goodwin Refractory Services Holdings Limited… …
Ying Tai (UK) Limited … … … … … …
Non-principal Associates:
Tet Goodwin Property Company Limited … … … 11

1
1

Dormant companies:
Gold Star Powders Limited … … … … …
Net Central Limited … … … … … …
Sandersfire International Limited … … … …
Soluform Limited
… … … … … …
Specialist Refractory Services Limited … … …

1
1
1
1
1

Registered Country of 
address*

Incorporation

Class of 
shares held % held 

India
Ghana

Brazil
India
Thailand
China
China

Ordinary
Ordinary

Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary
Ordinary

England and Wales Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary

Thailand

Ordinary

England and Wales Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary
England and Wales Ordinary

100 
100 

100 
100 
75 
75 
75 

100 
75 

49 

100 
100 
100 
100 
100 

*The registered address for each company can be found in note 34. 
All of the above companies are included as part of the consolidated accounts.  The trading companies are all involved 
in mechanical or refractory engineering.

33. Related parties 

Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries have been eliminated on consolidation and are not  
reported  in  this  note.    Year  end  balances  and  transactions  during  the  year  with  the  Group’s  associate   
company, Tet Goodwin Property Company Limited, are shown below.                                                                      
                                                                                                                        2023                   2022 
                                                                                                                                               £’000                  £’000 
301

… … … … …

Rental cost       …

318

…

…

…

…

…

90

 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

34. Registered offices of subsidiaries and associates 

The registered offices of the companies listed in notes 13 and 32 are listed below. 

Ivy House Foundry, Hanley, Stoke-on-Trent ST1 3NR 

1.
2. Brassington, Nr. Matlock, Derbyshire DE4 4HF 
3. 13-1, Jungbong-daero, 396 Beon-Gil, Seo-gu, Incheon, South Korea 
4. No 39/1-5, Old Mahabalipuram Road, Kalavakkam, Thiruporur Chengalpattu District – 603110, India 
5. Suite C, F1, Building #14, Xiya Road No.11, Waigaoqiao Free Trade Zone, 200131, Shanghai, China 
6. Hocksteiner Weg 56, D - 41189 Mönchengladbach, Germany 
7. Suite 1105, Building 1, Wanguocheng Moma, No.16 Changfeng West Street, Wanbailin District, Taiyuan, 

Shanxi Province, 30021, China 

8. Rua das Margaridas s/n, No. 70, Barrio Terra Preta - Mairipora – SP, CEP 07662-025, São Paulo, Brazil 
9. Confidential Tax and Business Services, Level 1, 449 Gympie Road, Kedron Qld 4031, Australia 
10. Koivupuistontie 34, 01510 Vantaa, Finland 
11. 99/9 Moo5 Khlong Yong, Bhudhamontol, Nakhonpathom, 73170 Thailand  
12. No.73, Jiao Xin Road, Lanhe Town, Nansha District, Guangzhou City, 511480, China 
13. 400 metres North from Nan Zhai Committee, Xifuzhen Street, Chengyang District, Qingdao City, 266106, 

China 

14. 238, 3rd Floor, OPG Tech Building Bangkhuntien-Chatalay, Samaedum Sub-district, Bangkhuntien District, 

Bangkok 10150, Thailand 

15. Unit 1 Bridgeway Business Park, Cnr Sam Green Road and Pinnacle Close, Tunney Extension 9, Germiston, 

Gauteng, 1401, South Africa 

16. No.2-1, Shanzixia Road, Dakang Community, Yuanshan Street, Longgang District, Shenzhen City, 

Guangdong Province, China 

17. 165 Minsheng Road, Lanhe Town, Nansha District, Guangzhou, China 
18. 11, NII Ablade Kotey Avenue, East Legon, Accra, Ghana

35. Share-based payment transactions 

The Group had one share option scheme, the LTIP, the terms of which are outlined in the Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy and Report on page 37.  The scheme has now ended.

Grant date/                        Method of           Maximum             Vesting                 Contractual life 
employees                         settlement          number of             conditions            of options 
entitled                                                        instruments 
Options granted on                 Equity                      576,000                      For every 10%          Expiry date: 
5th October, 2016                                                                                       growth in TSR          30th April, 2019 
to Executive                                                                                                28,800 shares 
Directors                                                                                                     will vest 

Awards entitle each holder to earn up to 1% of the share capital of the Company subject to the performance  
condition. 
An  award  vested  and  became  exercisable  over  0.05%  of  the  share  capital  of  the  Company  for  every  10%   
increase in the TSR of the Company at the end of the three financial years ending on 30th April, 2019 with  
a base year of 2009 but excluding the growth already achieved up to 30th April, 2016.

Number of share options 
Vested 1st May, 2019                           … … …  … … … … …                     -

              2023

2022  

489,600 

Outstanding at beginning of year      … … … … … … … …                     -

163,200 

Exercised during the year                   … … …  … … … … …                     -

163,200 

Exerciseable at end of year                … … …  … … … … …                     -

                     £

- 

£ 

Share price at the date of exercise    … … …  … … … … …                     -

30.70 

91

                                                         
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

GOODWIN PLC 
COMPANY BALANCE SHEET 
at 30th April, 2023 

NON-CURRENT ASSETS

Property, plant and equipment … … … … … …

Investment properties … … … … … … …

Right-of-use assets… … … … … … … …

Investments … … … … … … … … …

Intangible assets … … … … … … … …

Derivative financial assets

… … … … … …

Group receivables … … … … … … … …

CURRENT ASSETS

Other receivables … … … … … … … …

Derivative financial assets

… … … … … …

Cash at bank and in hand

… … … … … …

Notes

C4

C4

C4

C5

C6

28, C7

C8

C8

28, C7

2023
£’000

42,946

30,547

4,817

25,822

16,108

4,802

31,756

2022 
£’000 

33,696 

26,805 

4,085 

25,822 

15,681 

2,466 

30,177 

156,798

138,732 

938

1,127

12,962

15,027

1,178 

274 

851 

2,303 

TOTAL ASSETS

… … … … … … … …

171,825

141,035 

CURRENT LIABILITIES

Borrowings … … … … … … … … …

Other payables … … … … … … … …

NON-CURRENT LIABILITIES

Borrowings … … … … … … … … …

Deferred income … … … … … … … …

Deferred tax liabilities … … … … … … …

C9

C10

C9

C11

6,053

19,743

25,796

2,086

6,446 

8,532 

45,074

38,053 

780

8,300

803 

5,052 

54,154

43,908 

TOTAL LIABILITIES … … … … … … … …

79,950

52,440 

NET ASSETS … … … … … … … … …

91,875

88,595 

EQUITY

Called up share capital … … … … … … …

C12

Share-based payments reserve

… … … … …

Profit and loss account … … … … … … …

769

5,244

85,862

769 

5,244 

82,582 

TOTAL EQUITY  

… … … … … … … …

91,875

88,595 

Profit after tax for the year … … … … … … …

11,569

12,443  

The comparative figures have been amended to report the Group receivable balances as non-current assets.  

These financial statements were approved by the Board of Directors on 7th August, 2023 and signed on its behalf by:  

T. J. W. Goodwin
Director

M. S. Goodwin
Director

        S. R. Goodwin
        Director 

Company Registration Number: 305907 

The notes on pages 94 to 103 form part of these financial statements.

92

 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

GOODWIN PLC
COMPANY STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN EQUITY 

for the year ended 30th April, 2023

YEAR ENDED 30TH APRIL, 2023 
Balance at 1st May, 2022
Total comprehensive income: 
Profit for the year

… … … … …

… … … …

TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 
FOR THE YEAR
Dividends paid … … … … … …

Share-
based
payments
reserve
£’000

Share
capital
£’000

Retained
earnings
£’000

Total 
equity
£’000 

769

5,244

82,582

88,595

-

-
-

-

-
-

11,569

11,569 

11,569
(8,289)

11,569 
(8,289) 

BALANCE AT 30TH APRIL, 2023

769

5,244

85,862

91,875

YEAR ENDED 30TH APRIL, 2022 
Balance at 1st May, 2021
Total comprehensive income: 
Profit for the year

… … … … …

… … … …

TOTAL COMPREHENSIVE INCOME 
FOR THE YEAR
Issue of shares … … … … … …
Dividends paid … … … … … …

753

-

-
16
-

5,244

78,001

83,998

-

-
-
-

12,443

12,443 

12,443
-
(7,862)

12,443 
16 
(7,862) 

BALANCE AT 30TH APRIL, 2022

769

5,244

82,582

88,595

93

 
 
 
C1

Accounting policies 

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Principal accounting policies 
These financial statements present information about the Company as an individual undertaking and not 
about its Group.  These financial statements were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 
101 Reduced Disclosure Framework (“FRS 101”).  
Basis of accounting 
Goodwin PLC (the “Company”) is a Company incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales.  
These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Accounting Standards as 
adopted by the UK and in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 
The Company proposes to continue to adopt the reduced disclosure framework of FRS 101 in its next financial 
statements. The accounting policies set out below have, unless otherwise stated, been applied consistently 
to all periods presented in these financial statements.  
The Company is exempt under S408 (3) Companies Act 2006 from the requirement to present its own profit 
and loss account. 
In these financial statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect  
of the following disclosures: 
(cid:129) A cash flow statement and related notes; 
(cid:129) Comparative period reconciliations for share capital, tangible fixed assets and intangible assets; 
(cid:129) Disclosures in respect of transactions with wholly-owned subsidiaries; 
(cid:129) Disclosures in respect of capital management and 
(cid:129) The effects of new but not yet effective IFRSs. 
As the consolidated financial statements of Goodwin PLC include the equivalent disclosures, the Company 
has also taken the exemptions under FRS 101 available in respect of certain disclosures required by IFRS 13 
Fair Value Measurement and the disclosures required by IFRS 7 Financial Instrument Disclosures. 
Judgements made by the Directors, in the application of these accounting policies, that have significant  
effect on the financial statements and estimates with a significant risk of material adjustment in the next  
year are discussed in note 2 of the Group financial statements. 
Measurement convention 
The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost accounting rules except where the 
measurement of balances at fair value is required as below. 
Investments in subsidiary undertakings 
In the Company’s financial statements, investments in subsidiary undertakings are stated at cost less amounts 
written off for impairment. 
Foreign currency 
Transactions  in  foreign  currencies  are  translated  to  the  respective  functional  currencies  at  the  foreign   
exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction.  Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign 
currencies at the balance sheet date are translated at the foreign exchange rate ruling at that date.  Foreign 
exchange  differences  arising  on  translation  are  recognised  in  the  statement  of  profit  or  loss  within   
operating profit. 
Financial instruments 
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised on the Company’s balance sheet when the Company 
has  become  a  party  to  the  contractual  provisions  of  the  instrument.    The  principal  financial  assets  and   
liabilities of the Company are as follows: 
Principal non-derivative financial assets 

Other receivables 
Other receivables principally comprise short-term tax balances and receivables from Group undertakings.  
After being recognised initially at fair value, other receivables are measured, subsequently, at amortised 
cost.    The  carrying  amount  of  other  receivables  is  considered  to  be  a  reasonable  approximation  of   
their  fair  value.  A  provision  for  expected  credit  losses  (ECL)  is  not  seen  as  necessary  given  that  the   
counterparties  here  are  Group  undertakings.  The  Company  is  privy  to  both  the  accounts  and  future 
prospects  of  its  subsidiary  and  associate  companies.  Accordingly,  impairment  provisions  are  raised   
where the carrying value of a subsidiary company / associated company cannot be fully supported. 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and in hand including cash deposits with an original 
maturity of three months or less. 
Equity instruments 
Equity  instruments  are  stated  at  par  value,  with  the  par  value  of  ordinary  shares  being  reported  as   
share capital. 

94

 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C1

Accounting policies (continued) 

Principal non-derivative financial liabilities 

Financial liabilities are classified according to the substance of the contractual arrangements into which 
the Company has entered. 
Bank borrowings 
Interest-bearing  bank  loans  and  overdrafts  are  recorded  initially  at  their  fair  value  less  attributable   
transaction  costs.    They  are  subsequently  carried  at  their  amortised  cost  and  finance  charges  are   
recognised  in  the  statement  of  profit  or  loss  over  the  term  of  the  instrument  using  an  effective  rate   
of interest. 
Trade and other payables 
Trade and other payables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently at amortised cost using 
the effective interest method where material. 

Intangible fixed assets and amortisation 
Manufacturing  rights,  brand  names  and  customer  lists  purchased  by  the  Company  are  amortised  to  nil   
by equal annual instalments over their estimated useful lives.  Expenditure on development activities is  
capitalised if the product or process is technically and commercially feasible and the Company has sufficient 
resources to complete development.  The expenditure capitalised includes the cost of materials, direct labour 
and an appropriate proportion of overheads. 

Amortisation rates are as follows: 
Manufacturing rights … … … … … 11 - 15 years 
Brand names … … … … … … 20 years 
Software and licences
Intellectual property rights … … … … 15 - 20 years 
Non-compete agreements  … … … … 2 - 15 years 
Capitalised development costs … … … Minimum expected order unit intake or 

… … … … 3 - 5 years 

minimum product life 

… … … … … … over estimated production life 

Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. 
Where parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, they are accounted for 
as separate items of property, plant and equipment. 
Depreciation is charged to the statement of profit or loss over the estimated useful lives of each part of an 
item of property, plant and equipment on the following bases: 
Freehold land … … … … … … Nil 
Freehold buildings … … … … … 2% to 4% on reducing balance or cost  
Plant and machinery … … … … … 5% to 25% on reducing balance or cost 
Motor vehicles … … … … … … 15% or 25% on reducing balance 
Tooling
Other equipment  … … … … … 15% to 25% on reducing balance 
Assets in the course of construction are not depreciated. 
Before being brought into use, assets are assessed individually to determine which is the most appropriate 
depreciation method. At present, most assets are being depreciated on a reducing balance basis. 
Investment properties 
Investment properties are properties which are held either to earn rental income or for capital appreciation 
or for both. Investment properties are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation.  
Depreciation is charged to the statement of profit or loss on a straight-line basis or reducing balance basis 
over the estimated useful lives of investment properties which is typically 25 years. 
Government grants 
Government grants relating to income are recognised in the statement of profit or loss.  
Unamortised government grants relating to property, plant and equipment are recognised in the balance 
sheet as deferred income.  Amortisation of such grants is credited to profit and loss in accordance with the 
useful lives of the assets to which they relate. 
Provisions 
A  provision  is  recognised  in  the  balance  sheet  when  the  Company  has  a  present  legal  or  constructive   
obligation as a result of a past event, and it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required 
to settle the obligation.  If the effect is material, provisions are determined by discounting the expected  
future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and, 
where appropriate, the risks specific to the liability. 
Leases 
Definition of a lease 
A contract is a lease or contains a lease if it transfers the right to use an identified asset over the contract 
term, in exchange for payment.  In determining whether a contract gives the Company the right to use an 
asset, the Company assesses whether: 

95

C1

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Accounting policies (continued) 
Leases (continued)
Definition of a lease (continued) 
(cid:129) the contract involves the use of an identified asset; 
(cid:129) the Company has the right to obtain substantially all of the economic benefit of using the asset; and  
(cid:129) the Company has the right to direct the use of the asset by deciding how the asset is employed. 
Lease term 
The lease term is the non-cancellable period of a lease, and options to extend the lease or terminate it, where 
it is probable that the Company will exercise the available options.  At the start of a lease, the Company makes 
a judgement about whether it is reasonably certain to exercise the options, and reassesses this judgement at 
every reporting period.  Contracts, where the original lease term has expired, with assets continuing to be 
leased on a short-term rolling basis of a few months, are treated as short-term leases. 
Lease balances 
A right-of-use asset and a lease liability are calculated at the beginning of a lease.  The right-of-use asset is 
measured initially at cost, being the opening lease liability, adjusted for any lease payments made by the start 
of the lease, adjusted for any initial direct costs, which have been incurred. 
The lease liability is measured initially at the present value of the lease payments, which are outstanding at 
the start date, discounted at either the rate implicit in the lease or the Company’s incremental borrowing rate.  
With the exception of leases containing an option to purchase, the Company uses its incremental borrowing 
rate as the discount rate.  Lease liabilities are measured at amortised cost, using the effective rate, and  
adjusted as required for any subsequent change to the lease terms. 
The right-of-use asset is depreciated on a straight-line basis over the lease term, or from the start date of  
the lease to the end of the useful life of the right-of-use asset as appropriate.  The method of calculating  
the  estimated  useful  lives  of  the  right-of-use  assets  and  testing  for  impairment  is  the  same  as  that  for   
property, plant and equipment. 
Recognition exemptions 
Payments for short-term leases, lasting twelve months or less, without a purchase option, are reported an  
as operating expense on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. 
The cost of leasing low-value items is reported as an operating expense over the life of the lease. 
Finance costs (net) 
Finance costs comprise interest payable and interest on finance leases using the effective interest method, 
together with the amortisation of any facility arrangement fees.  Borrowing costs that are directly attributable 
to the acquisition, construction or production of an asset, which takes a substantial time to be prepared for 
use, are capitalised as part of the cost of that asset. 
Interest income and interest payable is recognised in the statement of profit or loss as it accrues. 
Pension costs 
The  Company  contributes  to  a  defined  contribution  pension  scheme  for  employees  under  an  Auto   
Enrolment Pension arrangement as required by Government legislation.  The assets of the scheme are held 
in independently administered funds.  Company pension costs are charged to the statement of profit or  
loss in the year for which contributions are payable. 
Taxation 
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax.  Tax is recognised in the statement 
of profit or loss except to the extent that it relates to items recognised directly in equity, in which case it is 
recognised in equity. 
Current  tax  is  the  expected  tax  payable  on  the  taxable  income  for  the  year,  using  tax  rates  enacted  or   
substantively enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous 
years. 
Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities  
for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes.  The amount of deferred tax 
provided is based on the expected manner of realisation or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and 
liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.  
A deferred tax asset is recognised only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be  
available against which the asset can be utilised. 
Share-based payment transactions 
Share-based payment arrangements, in which the Company receives goods or services as consideration for 
its own equity instruments, are accounted for as equity-settled share-based payment transactions, regardless 
of how the equity instruments are obtained by the Company. 
The  grant  date  fair  value  of  share-based  payment  awards  granted  to  employees  is  recognised  as  an   
employee  expense,  with  a  corresponding  increase  in  equity,  over  the  period  in  which  the  employees   
become unconditionally entitled to the awards.  The fair value of the awards is measured using an option 
valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the awards were granted. 

96

NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C1

Accounting policies (continued)

Interest swap derivative 
The mark to market value of the Company’s interest rate swap derivative is treated as not being hedged with 
the movement on the mark to market valuation being taken through the profit and loss account.

C2

Auditor’s remuneration 
Included in the profit / (loss) before taxation are the following: 

Fees receivable by the auditors and the auditor’s associates in respect of: 
Audit of these financial statements

… … … … … … …

2023
£’000

2022 
£’000 

80

66 

Amounts paid to the Company’s auditor in respect of services to the Company, other than the audit of the 
Company’s  financial  statements,  have  not  been  disclosed  as  the  information  is  required  instead  to  be   
disclosed on a consolidated basis (see note 5 of the Group financial statements).

C3

Staff numbers and costs

The average number of persons employed by the Company (including Directors) during the year, analysed 
by category, was as follows: 

      Number of employees 
                                                                                                                         2023                  2022 
Administration staff   …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …                    51                      50 

                                                                                                                                                 2023                  2022 
                                                                                                                                                £’000                 £’000 

The aggregate payroll costs of these persons were as follows: 
Wages and salaries     …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …             4,951                 4,293 
Social security costs   …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …                 616                 1,199 
Other pension costs    …       …       …       …       …       …       …       …      …      …               99                    103 

                                                                                                                                                 5,666                 5,595 

Details of the Directors’ remuneration can be found within the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 35. 
The emoluments of the highest paid Director were £406,000 (2022: £374,000).  The number of Directors  
who were members of a defined contribution pension scheme was 3 (2022: 6).  The social security costs  
include £nil million (2022: £0.7 million) in respect of employer’s national insurance relating to exercised  
share options under the Executive Directors’ Equity Long Term Incentive Plan.

97

 
 
 
                                                                                       
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C4

Tangible fixed assets 

Investment
properties 

Property, Plant and Equipment 

Cost 
Balance at 1st May, 2022
… …
Additions
Reclassification … …
Transfer to - ROU** …

£’000

34,575
292
4,511
-

Other
Land and Plant and equipment
buildings machinery
£’000

£’000

£’000

Assets in 
course of 
* construction
£’000

Total 
£’000 

5,753
2
(4,511)
-

40,857
1,429
178
-

1,941
76
-
-

6,951
14,791
(178)
(366)

55,502 
16,298 
(4,511) 
(366)  

Balance at 30th April, 2023 39,378

1,244

42,464

2,017

21,198 66,923 

Depreciation 
Balance at 1st May, 2022
Charged in the year …

7,770
1,061

702
22

19,679
2,030

1,425
119

Balance at 30th April, 2023

8,831

724

21,709

1,544

-
-

21,806 
2,171 

- 23,977 

Net book value 
At 30th April, 2022 …

26,805

5,051

21,178

At 30th April, 2023

30,547

520

20,755

516

473

6,951

33,696 

21,198 42,946 

* Other equipment comprises motor vehicles, IT hardware and office equipment. 

** This is a transfer to the right-of-use assets category, relating to ongoing investment in Green Projects. 

Land  with  a  net  book  value  of  £4.5  million (2022: £4.5 million)  and  furnaces  with  a  net  book  value  of   
£4.8 million (2022: £5.1 million) has been pledged as security for bank loans (refer to note C9). 
The Company’s investment properties have been valued, using the cost model, and depreciated over their 
estimated useful lives – typically 25 years. In the opinion of the Directors, the fair value of the investment 
properties as at 30th April, 2023 was estimated to be £62 million (2022: £51 million), compared with the  
net book value of £31 million (2022: £27 million). Fair value for this purpose is based on Level 3 fair value  
inputs and, specifically, the Directors’ opinion as to the amount for which the property could be exchanged 
between knowledgeable, willing parties in an arm’s length transaction given a reasonable timeframe in  
which to conclude such an exchange. Independent valuations have not been performed. 
Investment property income and operating expenses 
The Company rents investment properties to its UK subsidiaries.  There are no formal agreements in place 
and for this reason, it is not possible to disclose a maturity analysis of lease payments. 

                                                                                                                        2023                  2022 
                                                                                                                                               £’000                 £’000 
1,472 
Property income … … … … …
(876)
… … … …
Operating expenses

1,503
(819)

…
…

…
…

…
…

…
…

…
…

98

 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C4

Tangible fixed assets (continued)

Right-of-use assets 

Plant and
machinery
£’000

Other 
equipment
£’000

Cost
Balance at 1st May, 2022 … … … … …
Additions
… … … … … … …
Transfer from property, plant and equipment… …

Balance at 30th April, 2023

Depreciation
Balance at 1st May, 2022 … … … … …
Charged in the year … … … … … …

Balance at 30th April, 2023

Net book value 
At 30th April, 2022 … … … … … …

At 30th April, 2023

3,215
728
366

4,309

215
162

377

3,000

3,932

Total 
£’000 

4,781 
926 
366 

1,566
198
-

1,764

6,073 

481
398

696 
560 

879

1,256 

1,085

4,085 

885

4,817

C5

Fixed asset investments 

Cost
Balance at 1st May, 2022 … … … … …

Balance at 30th April, 2023

Impairment
Balance at 1st May, 2022 … … … … …

Balance at 30th April, 2023

Net book value 
At 30th April, 2022 … … … … … …

At 30th April, 2023

Shares in
associated
undertakings
£’000

Shares in 
Group 
undertakings
£’000

Total 
£’000 

237

237

-

-

237

237

31,498

31,735 

31,498

31,735 

5,913

5,913 

5,913

5,913 

25,585

25,822 

25,585

25,822  

A list of principal subsidiaries and associates is given in note 13 and a list of non-principal subsidiaries and 
associates is given in note 32 of the Group financial statements.

99

 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C6

Intangible assets 
                                                      Brand names                    
                                                                    and           Manu-
                                                        intellectual      facturing
                                                             property           rights
                                                                 £’000           £’000

Software
and
Licences
£’000

Develop- 
ment 
costs        Total 
£’000       £’000 

Cost                                          
Balance at 1st May, 2022    …       …                      8,043               1,653
Additions         …       …       …       …                         525                    19
Intercompany transfers      …       …                             -                       -
Disposals         …       …       …       …                             -                       -

495
11
-
(96)

10,725        20,916 
556          1,111 
370             370
(222)          (318)

Balance at 30th April, 2023                       8,568           1,672

410

11,429     22,079 

Amortisation                            
Balance at 1st May, 2022    …       …                      1,897               1,120
Amortisation for the year   …       …                         354                    68
Disposals         …       …       …       …                             -                       -

336
61
(96)

1,882          5,235 
571          1,054 
(222)          (318) 

Balance at 30th April, 2023                       2,251           1,188

301

2,231       5,971 

Net book value                                  
At 30th April, 2022    …       …       …                      6,146                  533

At 30th April, 2023                                     6,317              484

159

109

8,843        15,681 

9,198     16,108

C7

Interest rate swap

The Group utilises interest rate swap derivatives to hedge against future movements in floating interest  
rates against the Group's floating rate debt.  Hedge accounting is not applied for these instruments and  
all  movements  in  fair  value  are  recognised  in  profit  or  loss.  Further  details  are  contained  in  note  28  of   
the Group financial statements.

C8

Debtors 

Due after more than one year 
Interest-bearing 
Amounts owed by Group undertakings – repayable within five years … …
Non interest-bearing 
Amounts owed by Group undertakings – repayable within five years … …

Due within one year 
Other debtors … … … … … … … … … … …
Prepayments and accrued income
… … … … … … …
Corporation tax receivable… … … … … … … … …

2023
£’000

2022 
£’000 

8,495

7,767 

23,261

22,410 

31,756

30,177 

166
653
119

938

383 
695 
100 

1,178 

Amounts owed by Group undertakings are considered to be repayable within five years, as the Company 
supports the working capital requirements of the Group undertakings and repayment is required by the  
Company  only  when  there  are  excess  funds  within  each  specific  Group  undertaking.    The  comparative   
figures  have  been  adjusted  to  correct  the  analysis  between  interest  bearing  and  non-interest  bearing   
balances  owed  by  Group  undertakings,  and  to  show  all  group  receivable  balances  as  being  due  after   
more than one year.

100

 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C9

Borrowings

This note provides information about the contractual terms of the Company’s interest-bearing bank loans  
and borrowings.  For more information about the Group’s exposure to interest rate risk, see note 28 (d) of  
the Group financial statements.

2023

2022 

Bank overdrafts … … …
Bank loans repayable 
by instalments … … …
Bank loans - rolling 
credit facilities … … …
Other loans
… … …
Lease liabilities … … …

Current

Non-
current

Non-
current
liabilities liabilities borrowings liabilities
£’000
-

£’000
-

£’000
119

£’000
119

Total

Current

Total 
liabilities borrowings 
£’000 
- 

£’000
-

5,906

1,026

6,932

6,988

36,000
-
3,168

3,500
-
1,408

39,500
-
4,576

28,000
-
3,065

937

-
202
947

7,925 

28,000 
202 
4,012 

45,074

6,053

51,127

38,053

2,086

40,139

Lease liabilities 
Lease liabilities are payable as follows:

Less than one year … …
Between two and 
three years
Between four and 
five years

… … …

… … …

2023

2022 

Minimum
lease
payments
£’000
1,644

Interest Principal
£’000
1,408

£’000
236

Minimum
lease
payments
£’000
1,033

Interest Principal 
£’000 
947 

£’000
86

2,551

251

2,300

897

29

868

1,954

1,218

88

19

1,866 

1,199 

5,092

516

4,576

4,205

193

4,012

Bank loan repayable by instalments 
The loans are secured against three furnaces and land (see note C4). Bank loans are payable as follows:

2023

2022 

Minimum
loan
payments
£’000
1,362

Interest Principal
£’000
1,026

£’000
336

Minimum
loan
payments
£’000
1,145

Interest Principal 
£’000 
937 

£’000
208

2,527

559

1,968

2,267

330

1,937 

1,275
4,503

431
1,409

844
3,094

1,824
4,096

214
655

1,610 
3,441 

9,667

2,735

6,932

9,332

1,407

7,925

Less than one year … …
Between two and 
three years
Between four and 
five years
… … …
More than five years … …

… … …

C10 Other payables 

Trade payables
… … … … … … … … … …
Amounts owed to Group undertakings – interest-bearing… … … …
Amounts owed to Group undertakings – non interest-bearing … … …
Other taxation and social security
… … … … … … …
Other creditors
… … … … … … … … … …
Accruals and deferred income … … … … … … … …

101

2023
£’000
852
5,200
12,622
365
12
692

19,743

2022 
£’000 
966 
4,526 
14 
335 
245 
360 

6,446

 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C11 Provisions for deferred tax 

     Property,
    plant and
  equipment
          £’000
Balance at 1st May, 2022 … … …               6,865
… …               1,785
Recognised in profit or loss

Tax
losses
£’000
(2,496)
2,146

Derivatives
£’000
685
(685)

Other
£’000
(2)
2

Total 
£’000  
5,052 
3,248 

Balance at 30th April, 2023

          8,650

(350)

-

-

8,300

C12 Called up share capital

Authorised, allotted, called up and fully paid:
Balance at 1st May, 2022, 7,689,600 (2022: 7,526,400 ordinary shares of 10p each)
Issue of 163,200 ordinary shares of 10p each … … … … … …

Balance at 30th April

Details of the share issue are contained in note 35 of the Group financial statements.

2023
£’000

769
-

769

2022 
£’000 

753 
16 

769 

C13 Contingent liabilities 

The  Company  is  jointly  and  severally  liable  for  value  added  tax  due  by  other  members  of  the  Group   
amounting to £Nil (2022: £Nil).

C14 Related party balances and transactions

The Company has applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of the disclosure of transactions 
with wholly-owned subsidiary companies.  The Company has transacted with Easat Radar Systems Limited, 
Goodwin Korea Company Limited, Jewelry Plaster Limited, NRPL Aero Oy, Siam Casting Powders Limited, 
Ultratec Jewelry Supplies Limited and Ying Tai (UK) Limited which are not wholly-owned subsidiaries.  

2023
£’000

2022
£’000 

Related party balances 
Interest-bearing balances
Amounts owed by Group undertakings – repayable within five years
Non interest-bearing balances
Amounts owed by Group undertakings – repayable within five years
Non interest-bearing payable balances
Amounts owed by Group undertakings – repayable on demand … … …
Related party transactions
Dividend income
Interest income
Management fee income
Rental income
Royalty income

… … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … …
… … … … … … … …

… …

735

(149)

773
237
536
141
164

… … 7,998

7,767 

784 

- 

1,260 
219 
536 
76 
116 

Compensation of key management personnel 
Key  management  personnel  are  defined  in  the  Directors’  Remuneration  Report  on  page  36,  and  their   
remuneration is disclosed on page 36 of the Group financial statements.

C15 Commitments 

Contracted capital commitments at 30th April, 2023 for which no provision has been made in these financial 
statements were £1,510,000 (2022: £8,393,000).

C16 Subsequent events 

After the balance sheet date, ordinary dividends were declared of £8,636,000, which have not been provided 
for within these financial statements. 
The company announced on 5th May, 2023 that it was proceeding with a Tender offer to tender up to 180,000 
of its ordinary shares at the tender price of £48 per ordinary share.  The tender offer was subsequently  
approved at a General Meeting that was held on 30th May, 2023 and the following day the offer ended.   
The  offer  was  oversubscribed  by  229%  and,  of  the  total  number  of  Ordinary  Shares  validly  tendered,   
all 180,000 Ordinary Shares have been purchased by the Company and on 7th June, 2023 were cancelled 
off the register.  The total cost of Ordinary Shares  purchased was £8.64 million. The resulting number of 
shares as at the signing date is £7,509,600. 

102

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

C17 Dividends

Paid ordinary dividends during the year in respect of prior years
107.80p (2022: 102.24p) per qualifying ordinary share. … … … …

2023
£’000

8,289

2022 
£’000 

7,862 

After the balance sheet date an ordinary dividend of 115p per qualifying ordinary share was proposed by 
the Directors (2022: Ordinary dividend of 107.80p). 
The proposed current year ordinary dividend of £8,636,000 has not been provided for within these financial 
statements (2022: Proposed ordinary dividend of £8,289,000 was not provided for).

C18 Accounting estimates and judgements 

The material accounting estimates and judgements for the Company follow that of the Group which have 
been considered in note 2 of the Group financial statements.

C19 Share-based payment transactions 

Details of the equity-settled share-based payment transactions are disclosed in note 35 of the Group financial 
statements.

103

 
              
               
NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Alternative performance measures

Measure

Method of calculation / reference

Page No.

2023

2022 

Gross profit (£’000)
Revenue (£’000)

Consolidated statement of profit or loss
Consolidated statement of profit or loss

48
48

46,221
185,742

42,704 
144,108 

Gross profit as percentage of
revenue (%)

Gross profit / revenue

24.9%

29.6% 

Profit before tax (£’000)
Unrealised gain on 10 year 
interest rate swap derivative

Trading profit (£’000)

Consolidated statement of profit or loss

Consolidated statement of profit or loss

48

48

22,129

19,941 

(3,189)

(2,740) 

18,940

17,201 

Operating profit (£’000)
Capital employed (£’000)

Consolidated statement of profit or loss
Note 28 (d)

48
86

20,313
157,569

18,307 
145,095 

Return on capital employed (%)

Operating profit / capital employed

12.9%

12.6% 

Net debt (£’000)
Net assets attributable to equity 
holders of the parent (£’000)

Note 28 (d)

Consolidated balance sheet

Gearing (%)

Net debt / equity, as above

Net profit attributable to equity
holders of the parent (£’000)
Net assets attributable to equity 
holders of the parent (£’000) 

Consolidated statement of profit or loss

Consolidated balance sheet

86

52

48

52

32,822

29,785 

124,747

115,310 

26.3%

25.8% 

15,904

12,980 

124,747

115,310 

Return on investment (%)

Net profit / net assets

12.7%

11.3% 

Revenue (£’000)
Average number of employees

Consolidated statement of profit or loss
Note 6

48
67

185,742
1,144

144,108 
1,112

Sales per employee (£’000)

Group revenue / average employees

162,362

129,594 

Consolidated statement of profit or loss

Annual post tax profit (£’000)
Interest rate swap mark to market 
net of tax @ 19.49% (2022: 19%) (£’000) Consolidated statement of profit or loss
Note 8
Deferred tax rate change (£’000)
Note 8
Deferred tax rate difference (£’000)
Depreciation owned assets (£’000)
Note 5
Depreciation right-of-use assets (£’000) Note 5
Note 5
Amortisation and impairment (£’000)
Exclude operating 
lease depreciation (£’000)

48

48
68
68
67
67
67

Annual post tax profit + 
depreciation + amortisation (£’000)

16,513

13,620 

(2,576)
-
596
6,272
1,198
1,257

(2,219) 
2,012 
- 
6,202 
1,192 
1,572 

(538)

(508) 

22,731

21,871

104

 
 
 
                  
FIVE YEAR FINANCIAL SUMMARY

Continuing operations

2019
£’000

2020
£’000

2021
£’000

2022
£’000

2023 
£’000 

Revenue… … … … … … … …
Trading profit … … … … … … …
Profit before taxation
… … … … …
Tax on profit … … … … … … …
Profit after taxation … … … … … …

127,046
16,410
16,410
(3,963)
12,447

144,512
12,115
12,115
(3,775)
8,340

131,231
16,514
16,514
(3,508)
13,006

144,108
17,201
19,941
(6,321)
13,620

185,742 
18,940 
22,129 
(5,616) 
16,513 

Basic earnings per ordinary share (in pence) … …
…
Diluted earnings per ordinary share (in pence)

159.79p
159.79p

107.93p
103.31p

167.82p
164.23p

169.14p
169.14p

206.81p 
206.81p 

Total equity … … … … … … …

109,291

109,602

118,028

119,743

129,157 

Trading profit is defined as profit before tax, less the impact of the interest rate swap valuation.  The calculation is reported 
in the Alternative Performance Measures on page 104.

105